1 |
199 |
simons |
# Maintained by Axel Boldt (boldt@math.ucsb.edu)
|
2 |
|
|
#
|
3 |
|
|
# This version of the Linux kernel configuration help texts
|
4 |
|
|
# corresponds to the kernel versions 2.0.x.
|
5 |
|
|
#
|
6 |
|
|
# International versions of this file available on the WWW:
|
7 |
|
|
# - http://jf.gee.kyoto-u.ac.jp/JF/JF-ftp/euc/Configure.help.euc
|
8 |
|
|
# is a Japanese translation, maintained by Tetsuyasu YAMADA
|
9 |
|
|
# (tetsu@cauchy.nslab.ntt.jp).
|
10 |
|
|
# - http://nevod.perm.su/service/linux/doc/kernel/Configure.help
|
11 |
|
|
# is a Russian translation, maintained by kaf@linux.nevod.perm.su.
|
12 |
|
|
#
|
13 |
|
|
# Information about what a kernel is, what it does, how to patch and
|
14 |
|
|
# compile it and much more is contained in the Kernel-HOWTO, available
|
15 |
|
|
# via FTP (user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu in the directory
|
16 |
|
|
# /pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
17 |
|
|
#
|
18 |
|
|
# Format of this file: descriptionvariablehelptext.
|
19 |
|
|
# If the question being documented is of type "choice", we list
|
20 |
|
|
# only the first occurring config variable. The help texts
|
21 |
|
|
# must not contain empty lines. No variable should occur twice; if it
|
22 |
|
|
# does, only the first occurrence will be used by Configure. The lines
|
23 |
|
|
# in a help text should be indented two positions. Lines starting with
|
24 |
|
|
# `#' are ignored. To be nice to menuconfig, limit your lines to 70
|
25 |
|
|
# characters. Use emacs' kfill.el to edit this file or you lose.
|
26 |
|
|
#
|
27 |
|
|
# If you add a help text to this file, please try to be as gentle as
|
28 |
|
|
# possible. Don't use unexplained acronyms and generally write for the
|
29 |
|
|
# hypothetical user who has just bought a PC, removed Windows,
|
30 |
|
|
# installed Linux and is now recompiling the kernel for the first
|
31 |
|
|
# time. Tell them what to do if they're unsure. Technical information
|
32 |
|
|
# should go in a README in the Documentation directory. Mention all
|
33 |
|
|
# the relevant READMEs and HOWTOs in the help text.
|
34 |
|
|
#
|
35 |
|
|
# All this was shamelessly stolen from several different sources. Many
|
36 |
|
|
# thanks to all the contributors. Feel free to use these help texts
|
37 |
|
|
# in your own kernel configuration tools. The texts are copyrighted
|
38 |
|
|
# (c) 1995,1996 by Axel Boldt and governed by the GNU Public License.
|
39 |
|
|
|
40 |
|
|
Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
|
41 |
|
|
CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL
|
42 |
|
|
Some of the various things that Linux supports (such as network
|
43 |
|
|
drivers, filesystems, network protocols, etc.) can be in a state
|
44 |
|
|
of development where the functionality, stability, or the level of
|
45 |
|
|
testing is not yet high enough for general use. This is usually
|
46 |
|
|
known as the "alpha-test" phase amongst developers. If a feature is
|
47 |
|
|
currently in alpha-test, then the developers usually discourage
|
48 |
|
|
uninformed widespread use of this feature by the general public to
|
49 |
|
|
avoid "Why doesn't this work?" type mail messages. However, active
|
50 |
|
|
testing and use of these systems is welcomed. Just be aware that it
|
51 |
|
|
may not meet the normal level of reliability or it may fail to work
|
52 |
|
|
in some special cases. Detailed bug reports from people familiar
|
53 |
|
|
with the kernel internals are usually welcomed by the developers.
|
54 |
|
|
Unless you intend to help test and develop a feature or driver that
|
55 |
|
|
falls into this category, or you have a situation that requires
|
56 |
|
|
using these features you should probably say N here, which will
|
57 |
|
|
cause this configure script to present you with fewer choices. If
|
58 |
|
|
you say Y here, you will be offered the choice of using features or
|
59 |
|
|
drivers that are currently considered to be in the alpha-test phase.
|
60 |
|
|
|
61 |
|
|
Symmetric Multi Processing
|
62 |
|
|
CONFIG_SMP
|
63 |
|
|
This enables support for systems with more than one CPU. If you have a
|
64 |
|
|
system with only one CPU, like most personal computers, say N. If you
|
65 |
|
|
have a system with more than one CPU, say Y.
|
66 |
|
|
|
67 |
|
|
A non-SMP kernel will run on any machine, but will use only one CPU of
|
68 |
|
|
a multi-CPU machine. An SMP kernel will run on many, but not all,
|
69 |
|
|
single-CPU machines. On a single-CPU machine, a non-SMP kernel
|
70 |
|
|
will run faster than an SMP kernel.
|
71 |
|
|
|
72 |
|
|
People using multiprocessor machines should also say Y to "Enhanced
|
73 |
|
|
Real Time Clock Support", below. The "Advanced Power Management"
|
74 |
|
|
code will be disabled in an SMP kernel.
|
75 |
|
|
|
76 |
|
|
If you don't know what to do here, say N.
|
77 |
|
|
|
78 |
|
|
See also: Documentation/SMP.txt, Documentation/smp.tex,
|
79 |
|
|
Documentation/smp.txt, and Documentation/IO-APIC.txt. Also see the
|
80 |
|
|
SMP-FAQ on the WWW at http://www.irisa.fr/prive/mentre/smp-faq/ (to
|
81 |
|
|
browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet
|
82 |
|
|
that has a program like lynx or netscape).
|
83 |
|
|
|
84 |
|
|
Kernel math emulation
|
85 |
|
|
CONFIG_MATH_EMULATION
|
86 |
|
|
Linux can emulate a math coprocessor (used for floating point
|
87 |
|
|
operations) if you don't have one. 486DX and Pentium processors have
|
88 |
|
|
a math coprocessor built in, 486SX and 386 do not, unless you added
|
89 |
|
|
a 487DX or 387, respectively. (The messages during boot time can
|
90 |
|
|
give you some hints here ["man dmesg"]) Everyone needs either a
|
91 |
|
|
coprocessor or this emulation. If you enable this emulation even
|
92 |
|
|
though you have a coprocessor, the coprocessor will be used
|
93 |
|
|
nevertheless. (This behavior can be changed with the kernel command
|
94 |
|
|
line option "no387", which comes handy if your coprocessor is
|
95 |
|
|
broken. See the documentation of your boot loader (lilo or loadlin)
|
96 |
|
|
about how to pass options to the kernel at boot time. The lilo
|
97 |
|
|
procedure is also explained in the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
98 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.) This
|
99 |
|
|
means that it is a good idea to say Y here if you intend to use this
|
100 |
|
|
kernel on different machines. More information about the internals
|
101 |
|
|
of Linux math coprocessor emulation can be found in
|
102 |
|
|
arch/i386/math-emu/README. If you are not sure, say Y; apart from
|
103 |
|
|
resulting in a 45kB bigger kernel, it won't hurt.
|
104 |
|
|
|
105 |
|
|
Max physical memory
|
106 |
|
|
CONFIG_MAX_MEMSIZE
|
107 |
|
|
Linux/x86 can use up to ~3.5 gigabytes of physical memory. Default
|
108 |
|
|
is maximum 950 megabyte physical memory, this is enough for most
|
109 |
|
|
systems. (if you have more than 900MB RAM, see
|
110 |
|
|
Documentation/more-than-900MB-RAM.txt how to configure this option. Do
|
111 |
|
|
not change this value if you have less than 950MB RAM!)
|
112 |
|
|
|
113 |
|
|
Normal floppy disk support
|
114 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_FD
|
115 |
|
|
If you want to use your floppy disk drive(s) under Linux, say Y.
|
116 |
|
|
Information about this driver, especially important for IBM Thinkpad
|
117 |
|
|
users, is contained in drivers/block/README.fd. This driver is also
|
118 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
119 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
120 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
121 |
|
|
|
122 |
|
|
RAM disk support
|
123 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_RAM
|
124 |
|
|
Enabling this option will allow you to use a portion of your RAM
|
125 |
|
|
memory as a block device, so that you can make filesystems on it,
|
126 |
|
|
read and write to it and do all the other things that normal block
|
127 |
|
|
devices (such as hard drives) can do. It is usually used to load and
|
128 |
|
|
store a copy of a minimal root file system off of a floppy into RAM
|
129 |
|
|
during the initial install of Linux. Note that the kernel command
|
130 |
|
|
line option "ramdisk=XX" is now obsolete. For details, read
|
131 |
|
|
Documentation/ramdisk.txt. If you want to compile this as a module
|
132 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
133 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want), say M and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
134 |
|
|
Most normal users won't need the RAM disk functionality, and can
|
135 |
|
|
thus say N here.
|
136 |
|
|
|
137 |
|
|
RAM disk releasable blocks
|
138 |
|
|
CONFIG_RD_RELEASE_BLOCKS
|
139 |
|
|
If this option is enabled, the RAM disk will attempt to release blocks
|
140 |
|
|
(thus freeing memory) that are empty -- contain only zeros. This slows
|
141 |
|
|
down writes to RAM disks by an unknown degree.
|
142 |
|
|
|
143 |
|
|
Initial RAM disk (initrd) support
|
144 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_INITRD
|
145 |
|
|
The initial RAM disk is a RAM disk that is loaded by the boot loader
|
146 |
|
|
(LOADLIN or LILO) and that is mounted as root before the normal boot
|
147 |
|
|
procedure. It is typically used to load modules needed to mount the
|
148 |
|
|
"real" root file system, etc. See Documentation/initrd.txt for
|
149 |
|
|
details.
|
150 |
|
|
|
151 |
|
|
Loop device support
|
152 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_LOOP
|
153 |
|
|
Enabling this option will allow you to mount a file as a file
|
154 |
|
|
system. This is useful if you want to check an ISO9660 file system
|
155 |
|
|
before burning the CD, or want to use floppy images without first
|
156 |
|
|
writing them to floppy. This option also allows one to mount a
|
157 |
|
|
filesystem with encryption. To use these features, you need a
|
158 |
|
|
recent version of mount (check the file Documentation/Changes for
|
159 |
|
|
location and latest version). Note that this loop device has
|
160 |
|
|
nothing to do with the loopback device used for network connections
|
161 |
|
|
from the machine to itself. Most users will answer N here.
|
162 |
|
|
|
163 |
|
|
Enhanced IDE/MFM/RLL disk/cdrom/tape/floppy support
|
164 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE
|
165 |
|
|
This will use the full-featured IDE driver to control up to four
|
166 |
|
|
IDE interfaces, for a combination of up to eight IDE
|
167 |
|
|
disk/cdrom/tape/floppy drives. Useful information about large
|
168 |
|
|
(>540MB) IDE disks, sound card IDE ports, and other topics, is all
|
169 |
|
|
contained in Documentation/ide.txt. If you have one or more IDE
|
170 |
|
|
drives, say Y here. If your system has no IDE drives, or if
|
171 |
|
|
memory requirements are really tight, you could say N here, and
|
172 |
|
|
select the Old hard disk driver instead to save about 13kB of
|
173 |
|
|
memory in the kernel. To fine-tune IDE drive/interface parameters
|
174 |
|
|
for improved performance, look for the hdparm package at
|
175 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/kernel/patches/diskdrives/
|
176 |
|
|
|
177 |
|
|
Old hard disk (MFM/RLL/IDE) driver
|
178 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_HD_ONLY
|
179 |
|
|
There are two drivers for MFM/RLL/IDE disks. Most people use the
|
180 |
|
|
newer enhanced driver, but the old one is still around for two
|
181 |
|
|
reasons. Some older systems have strange timing problems and seem
|
182 |
|
|
to work only with the old driver (which itself does not work with
|
183 |
|
|
some newer systems). The other reason is that the old driver is
|
184 |
|
|
smaller, since it lacks the enhanced functionality of the new one.
|
185 |
|
|
This makes it a good choice for systems with very tight memory
|
186 |
|
|
restrictions, or for systems with only older MFM/RLL/ESDI drives.
|
187 |
|
|
Choosing the old driver can save 13kB or so of kernel memory. If
|
188 |
|
|
you are unsure, then just choose the Enhanced IDE/MFM/RLL driver
|
189 |
|
|
instead of this one.
|
190 |
|
|
|
191 |
|
|
Use old disk-only driver on primary interface
|
192 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_HD_IDE
|
193 |
|
|
There are two drivers for MFM/RLL/IDE disks. Most people use just
|
194 |
|
|
the new enhanced driver by itself. This option installs the old
|
195 |
|
|
hard disk driver to control the primary IDE/disk interface in the
|
196 |
|
|
system, leaving the new enhanced IDE driver take care of only the
|
197 |
|
|
2nd/3rd/4th IDE interfaces. Doing this will prevent you from having
|
198 |
|
|
an IDE/ATAPI CDROM or tape drive connected to the primary IDE
|
199 |
|
|
interface. Choosing this option may be useful for older systems
|
200 |
|
|
which have MFM/RLL/ESDI controller+drives at the primary port
|
201 |
|
|
address (0x1f0), along with IDE drives at the secondary/3rd/4th port
|
202 |
|
|
addresses. Normally, just say N here; you will then use the new
|
203 |
|
|
driver for all 4 interfaces.
|
204 |
|
|
|
205 |
|
|
Use multi-mode by default
|
206 |
|
|
CONFIG_IDEDISK_MULTI_MODE
|
207 |
|
|
If you get this error, try to enable this option.
|
208 |
|
|
|
209 |
|
|
hda: set_multmode: status=0x51 { DriveReady SeekComplete Error }
|
210 |
|
|
hda: set_multmode: error=0x04 { DriveStatusError }
|
211 |
|
|
|
212 |
|
|
If in doubt, say N.
|
213 |
|
|
|
214 |
|
|
Include IDE/ATAPI CDROM support
|
215 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDECD
|
216 |
|
|
If you have a CDROM drive using the ATAPI protocol, say Y. ATAPI is
|
217 |
|
|
a new protocol used by IDE CDROM and TAPE drives, similar to the
|
218 |
|
|
SCSI protocol. Most new CDROM drives use ATAPI, including the
|
219 |
|
|
NEC-260, Mitsumi FX400, Sony 55E, and just about all non-SCSI
|
220 |
|
|
double(2X), quad(4X), and six(6X) speed drives. At boot time, the
|
221 |
|
|
TAPE drive will be identified along with other IDE devices, as "hdb"
|
222 |
|
|
or "hdc", or something similar.
|
223 |
|
|
If this is your only CDROM drive, you can say N to all other CDROM
|
224 |
|
|
options, but be sure to say Y to the ISO9660 filesystem. Read the
|
225 |
|
|
CDROM-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
226 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO and the file
|
227 |
|
|
Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd. Note that older versions of lilo (the
|
228 |
|
|
Linux boot loader) cannot properly deal with IDE/ATAPI CDROMs, so
|
229 |
|
|
install lilo-16 or higher, available from
|
230 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Linux-boot/lilo.
|
231 |
|
|
|
232 |
|
|
Include IDE/ATAPI TAPE support
|
233 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDETAPE
|
234 |
|
|
If you have an IDE tape drive using the ATAPI protocol, say Y.
|
235 |
|
|
ATAPI is a new protocol used by IDE TAPE and ATAPI drives,
|
236 |
|
|
similar to the SCSI protocol. At boot time, the TAPE drive will
|
237 |
|
|
be identified along with other IDE devices, as "hdb" or "hdc",
|
238 |
|
|
or something similar, and will be mapped to a character device
|
239 |
|
|
such as "ht0". Be sure to consult the drivers/block/ide-tape.c
|
240 |
|
|
and Documentation/ide.txt files for usage information.
|
241 |
|
|
|
242 |
|
|
Include IDE/ATAPI FLOPPY support (new)
|
243 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEFLOPPY
|
244 |
|
|
If you have an IDE floppy which uses the ATAPI protocol, say Y.
|
245 |
|
|
ATAPI is a new protocol used by IDE cdrom/tape/floppy drives,
|
246 |
|
|
similar to the SCSI protocol. IDE floppy drives include the LS-120
|
247 |
|
|
and the ATAPI ZIP (ATAPI PD-CD drives are not supported by this
|
248 |
|
|
driver; support for PD-CD drives is available through the SCSI
|
249 |
|
|
emulation). At boot time, the FLOPPY drive will be identified along
|
250 |
|
|
with other IDE devices, as "hdb" or "hdc", or something similar.
|
251 |
|
|
|
252 |
|
|
SCSI emulation support
|
253 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDESCSI
|
254 |
|
|
This will provide SCSI host adapter emulation for IDE ATAPI devices,
|
255 |
|
|
and will allow you to use a SCSI device driver instead of a native
|
256 |
|
|
ATAPI driver. This is useful if you have an ATAPI device for which
|
257 |
|
|
no native driver has been written (for example, an ATAPI PD-CD
|
258 |
|
|
drive); you can then use this emulation together with an appropriate
|
259 |
|
|
SCSI device driver. If both this SCSI emulation and native ATAPI
|
260 |
|
|
support are compiled into the kernel, the native support will be
|
261 |
|
|
used. Normally, say N.
|
262 |
|
|
|
263 |
|
|
Support removable IDE interfaces (PCMCIA)
|
264 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_PCMCIA
|
265 |
|
|
This option adds code to the IDE driver to handle hot insertion
|
266 |
|
|
and removal of IDE interfaces and drives, under direction of an
|
267 |
|
|
external utility (?). Normally, just say N here.
|
268 |
|
|
|
269 |
|
|
CMD640 chipset bugfix/support
|
270 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_CMD640
|
271 |
|
|
The CMD-Technologies CMD640 chip is used on many common 486 and
|
272 |
|
|
Pentium motherboards, usually in combination with a "Neptune" or
|
273 |
|
|
"SiS" chipset. Unfortunately, it has a number of rather nasty
|
274 |
|
|
design flaws that can cause severe data corruption under many common
|
275 |
|
|
conditions. Say Y here to include code which tries to automatically
|
276 |
|
|
detect and correct the problems under Linux. This option also
|
277 |
|
|
enables access to the secondary IDE ports in some CMD640 based
|
278 |
|
|
systems. This driver will work automatically in PCI based systems
|
279 |
|
|
(most new systems have PCI slots). But if your system uses VESA
|
280 |
|
|
local bus (VLB) instead of PCI, you must also supply a kernel boot
|
281 |
|
|
parameter to enable the CMD640 bugfix/support: "ide0=cmd640_vlb" The
|
282 |
|
|
CMD640 chip is also used on add-in cards by Acculogic, and on the
|
283 |
|
|
"CSA-6400E PCI to IDE controller" that some people have. For
|
284 |
|
|
details, read Documentation/ide.txt. If unsure, say Y.
|
285 |
|
|
|
286 |
|
|
CMD640 enhanced support
|
287 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_CMD640_ENHANCED
|
288 |
|
|
This option includes support for setting/autotuning PIO modes and
|
289 |
|
|
prefetch on CMD640 IDE interfaces. For details, read
|
290 |
|
|
Documentation/ide.txt. If you have a CMD640 IDE interface and your
|
291 |
|
|
BIOS does not already do this for you, then say Y here. Otherwise
|
292 |
|
|
say N.
|
293 |
|
|
|
294 |
|
|
RZ1000 chipset bugfix/support
|
295 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_RZ1000
|
296 |
|
|
The PC-Technologies RZ1000 chip is used on many common 486 and
|
297 |
|
|
Pentium motherboards, usually along with the "Neptune" chipset.
|
298 |
|
|
Unfortunately, it has a rather nasty design flaw that can cause
|
299 |
|
|
severe data corruption under many conditions. Say Y here to include
|
300 |
|
|
code which automatically detects and corrects the problem under
|
301 |
|
|
Linux. This may slow disk throughput by a few percent, but at least
|
302 |
|
|
things will operate 100% reliably. If unsure, say Y.
|
303 |
|
|
|
304 |
|
|
Other IDE chipset support
|
305 |
|
|
CONFIG_IDE_CHIPSETS
|
306 |
|
|
Say Y here if you want to include enhanced support for various IDE
|
307 |
|
|
interface chipsets used on motherboards and add-on cards. This
|
308 |
|
|
enhanced support may be necessary for Linux to be able to access the
|
309 |
|
|
3rd/4th drives in some systems. It may also enable setting of
|
310 |
|
|
higher speed I/O rates to improve system performance with these
|
311 |
|
|
chipsets. Most of these also require special kernel boot parameters
|
312 |
|
|
to actually turn on the support at runtime.
|
313 |
|
|
|
314 |
|
|
DTC-2278 support
|
315 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_DTC2278
|
316 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=dtc2278" kernel
|
317 |
|
|
boot parameter. It enables support for the secondary IDE interface
|
318 |
|
|
of the DTC-2278 card, and permits faster I/O speeds to be set as
|
319 |
|
|
well. See the Documentation/ide.txt and dtc2278.c files for more
|
320 |
|
|
info.
|
321 |
|
|
|
322 |
|
|
Holtek HT6560B support
|
323 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_HT6560B
|
324 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=ht6560b" kernel
|
325 |
|
|
boot parameter. It enables support for the secondary IDE interface
|
326 |
|
|
of the Holtek card, and permits faster I/O speeds to be set as well.
|
327 |
|
|
See the Documentation/ide.txt and ht6560b.c files for more info.
|
328 |
|
|
|
329 |
|
|
QDI QD6580 support
|
330 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_QD6580
|
331 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=qd6580" kernel
|
332 |
|
|
boot parameter. It permits faster I/O speeds to be set. See the
|
333 |
|
|
Documentation/ide.txt and qd6580.c files for more info.
|
334 |
|
|
|
335 |
|
|
UMC 8672 support
|
336 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_UMC8672
|
337 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=umc8672" kernel
|
338 |
|
|
boot parameter. It enables support for the secondary IDE interface
|
339 |
|
|
of the UMC-8672, and permits faster I/O speeds to be set as well.
|
340 |
|
|
See the Documentation/ide.txt and umc8672.c files for more info.
|
341 |
|
|
|
342 |
|
|
ALI M14xx support
|
343 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_ALI14XX
|
344 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=ali14xx" kernel
|
345 |
|
|
boot parameter. It enables support for the secondary IDE interface
|
346 |
|
|
of the ALI M1439/1443/1445/1487/1489 chipsets, and permits faster
|
347 |
|
|
I/O speeds to be set as well. See the Documentation/ide.txt and
|
348 |
|
|
ali14xx.c files for more info.
|
349 |
|
|
|
350 |
|
|
PROMISE DC4030 support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
351 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_PROMISE
|
352 |
|
|
This driver is enabled at runtime using the "ide0=dc4030" kernel
|
353 |
|
|
boot parameter. It enables support for the secondary IDE interface
|
354 |
|
|
of the chipset, and takes advantage of the caching features of the
|
355 |
|
|
card. This driver is known to incur timeouts/retries during heavy
|
356 |
|
|
I/O to drives attached to the secondary interface. CDROM and TAPE
|
357 |
|
|
devices are not supported yet. See the Documentation/ide.txt and
|
358 |
|
|
promise.c files for more info.
|
359 |
|
|
|
360 |
|
|
XT hard disk support
|
361 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_XD
|
362 |
|
|
Very old 8 bit hard disk controllers used in the IBM XT computer.
|
363 |
|
|
To include a driver for these, say Y. If you want to compile the
|
364 |
|
|
driver as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
365 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
366 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
367 |
|
|
It's pretty unlikely that you have one of these: say N.
|
368 |
|
|
|
369 |
|
|
Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller support
|
370 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_DAC960
|
371 |
|
|
This driver adds support for the Mylex DAC960, AcceleRAID, and
|
372 |
|
|
eXtremeRAID PCI RAID controllers. See README.DAC960 for further
|
373 |
|
|
information about this driver.
|
374 |
|
|
|
375 |
|
|
Parallel port IDE device support
|
376 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE
|
377 |
|
|
There are many external CD-ROM and disk devices that connect through
|
378 |
|
|
your computer's parallel port. Most of them are actually IDE devices
|
379 |
|
|
using a parallel port IDE adapter. This option enables the PARIDE
|
380 |
|
|
subsystem which contains drivers for many of these external drives.
|
381 |
|
|
Read linux/Documentation/paride.txt for more information.
|
382 |
|
|
If you built PARIDE support into your kernel, you may still build
|
383 |
|
|
the individual protocol modules and high-level drivers as loadable
|
384 |
|
|
modules. If you build this support as a module, it will be called
|
385 |
|
|
paride.o. To use the PARIDE support, you must say Y or M here and
|
386 |
|
|
also to at least one high-level driver (e.g. "Parallel port IDE
|
387 |
|
|
disks", "Parallel port ATAPI CD-ROMs", "Parallel port ATAPI disks"
|
388 |
|
|
etc.) and to at least one protocol driver (e.g. "ATEN EH-100
|
389 |
|
|
protocol", "MicroSolutions backpack protocol", "DataStor Commuter
|
390 |
|
|
protocol" etc.).
|
391 |
|
|
|
392 |
|
|
Parallel port IDE disks
|
393 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_PD
|
394 |
|
|
This option enables the high-level driver for IDE-type disk devices
|
395 |
|
|
connected through a parallel port. If you chose to build PARIDE
|
396 |
|
|
support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the
|
397 |
|
|
parallel port IDE driver, otherwise you should answer M to build
|
398 |
|
|
it as a loadable module. The module will be called pd.o. You
|
399 |
|
|
must also have at least one parallel port protocol driver in your
|
400 |
|
|
system. Among the devices supported by this driver are the SyQuest
|
401 |
|
|
EZ-135, EZ-230 and SparQ drives, the Avatar Shark and the backpack
|
402 |
|
|
hard drives from MicroSolutions.
|
403 |
|
|
|
404 |
|
|
Parallel port ATAPI CD-ROMs
|
405 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_PCD
|
406 |
|
|
This option enables the high-level driver for ATAPI CD-ROM devices
|
407 |
|
|
connected through a parallel port. If you chose to build PARIDE
|
408 |
|
|
support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the
|
409 |
|
|
parallel port ATAPI CD-ROM driver, otherwise you should answer M to
|
410 |
|
|
build it as a loadable module. The module will be called pcd.o. You
|
411 |
|
|
must also have at least one parallel port protocol driver in your
|
412 |
|
|
system. Among the devices supported by this driver are the
|
413 |
|
|
MicroSolutions backpack CD-ROM drives and the Freecom Power CD. If
|
414 |
|
|
you have such a CD-ROM drive, you should also say Y to "ISO9660
|
415 |
|
|
cdrom filesystem support" below, because that's the filesystem used
|
416 |
|
|
on CDROMs.
|
417 |
|
|
|
418 |
|
|
Parallel port ATAPI disks
|
419 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_PF
|
420 |
|
|
This option enables the high-level driver for ATAPI disk devices
|
421 |
|
|
connected through a parallel port. If you chose to build PARIDE
|
422 |
|
|
support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the
|
423 |
|
|
parallel port ATAPI disk driver, otherwise you should answer M
|
424 |
|
|
to build it as a loadable module. The module will be called pf.o.
|
425 |
|
|
You must also have at least one parallel port protocol driver in
|
426 |
|
|
your system. Among the devices supported by this driver are the
|
427 |
|
|
MicroSolutions backpack PD/CD drive and the Imation Superdisk
|
428 |
|
|
LS-120 drive.
|
429 |
|
|
|
430 |
|
|
Parallel port ATAPI tapes
|
431 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_PT
|
432 |
|
|
This option enables the high-level driver for ATAPI tape devices
|
433 |
|
|
connected through a parallel port. If you chose to build PARIDE
|
434 |
|
|
support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the
|
435 |
|
|
parallel port ATAPI tape driver, otherwise you should answer M
|
436 |
|
|
to build it as a loadable module. The module will be called pt.o.
|
437 |
|
|
You must also have at least one parallel port protocol driver in
|
438 |
|
|
your system. Among the devices supported by this driver is the
|
439 |
|
|
parallel port version of the HP 5GB drive.
|
440 |
|
|
|
441 |
|
|
Parallel port generic ATAPI devices
|
442 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_PG
|
443 |
|
|
This option enables a special high-level driver for generic ATAPI
|
444 |
|
|
devices connected through a parallel port. The driver allows user
|
445 |
|
|
programs, such as cdrecord, to send ATAPI commands directly to
|
446 |
|
|
a device. If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel,
|
447 |
|
|
you may answer Y here to build in the parallel port generic ATAPI
|
448 |
|
|
driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable
|
449 |
|
|
module. The module will be called pg.o. You must also have at
|
450 |
|
|
least one parallel port protocol driver in your system. This driver
|
451 |
|
|
implements an API loosely related to the generic SCSI driver. See
|
452 |
|
|
/usr/include/linux/pg.h for details. You can obtain the most recent
|
453 |
|
|
version of cdrecord from ftp://ftp.fokus.gmd.de/pub/unix/cdrecord/ .
|
454 |
|
|
Versions 1.6.1a3 and later fully support the pg driver.
|
455 |
|
|
|
456 |
|
|
ATEN EH-100 protocol
|
457 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_ATEN
|
458 |
|
|
This option enables support for the ATEN EH-100 parallel port IDE
|
459 |
|
|
protocol. This protocol is used in some inexpensive low performance
|
460 |
|
|
parallel port kits made in Hong Kong. If you chose to build PARIDE
|
461 |
|
|
support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the
|
462 |
|
|
protocol driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a
|
463 |
|
|
loadable module. The module will be called aten.o. You must also
|
464 |
|
|
have a high-level driver for the type of device that you want to
|
465 |
|
|
support.
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
|
|
MicroSolutions backpack protocol
|
468 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_BPCK
|
469 |
|
|
This option enables support for the MicroSolutions backpack
|
470 |
|
|
parallel port IDE protocol. If you chose to build PARIDE support
|
471 |
|
|
into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the protocol
|
472 |
|
|
driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable
|
473 |
|
|
module. The module will be called bpck.o. You must also have
|
474 |
|
|
a high-level driver for the type of device that you want to support.
|
475 |
|
|
|
476 |
|
|
DataStor Commuter protocol
|
477 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_COMM
|
478 |
|
|
This option enables support for the Commuter parallel port IDE
|
479 |
|
|
protocol from DataStor. If you chose to build PARIDE support
|
480 |
|
|
into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the protocol
|
481 |
|
|
driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable
|
482 |
|
|
module. The module will be called comm.o. You must also have
|
483 |
|
|
a high-level driver for the type of device that you want to support.
|
484 |
|
|
|
485 |
|
|
DataStor EP-2000 protocol
|
486 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_DSTR
|
487 |
|
|
This option enables support for the EP-2000 parallel port IDE
|
488 |
|
|
protocol from DataStor. If you chose to build PARIDE support
|
489 |
|
|
into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the protocol
|
490 |
|
|
driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable
|
491 |
|
|
module. The module will be called dstr.o. You must also have
|
492 |
|
|
a high-level driver for the type of device that you want to support.
|
493 |
|
|
|
494 |
|
|
Shuttle EPAT/EPEZ protocol
|
495 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_EPAT
|
496 |
|
|
This option enables support for the EPAT parallel port IDE
|
497 |
|
|
protocol. EPAT is a parallel port IDE adapter manufactured by
|
498 |
|
|
Shuttle Technology and widely used in devices from major vendors
|
499 |
|
|
such as Hewlett-Packard, SyQuest, Imation and Avatar. If you
|
500 |
|
|
chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you may answer Y
|
501 |
|
|
here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you should answer M
|
502 |
|
|
to build it as a loadable module. The module will be called epat.o.
|
503 |
|
|
You must also have a high-level driver for the type of device that
|
504 |
|
|
you want to support.
|
505 |
|
|
|
506 |
|
|
Shuttle EPIA protocol
|
507 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_EPIA
|
508 |
|
|
This option enables support for the (obsolete) EPIA parallel port
|
509 |
|
|
IDE protocol from Shuttle Technology. This adapter can still be
|
510 |
|
|
found in some no-name kits. If you chose to build PARIDE support
|
511 |
|
|
into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the protocol
|
512 |
|
|
driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable
|
513 |
|
|
module. The module will be called epia.o. You must also have a
|
514 |
|
|
high-level driver for the type of device that you want to support.
|
515 |
|
|
|
516 |
|
|
FIT TD-2000 protocol
|
517 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_FIT2
|
518 |
|
|
This option enables support for the TD-2000 parallel port IDE
|
519 |
|
|
protocol from Fidelity International Technology. This is a simple
|
520 |
|
|
(low speed) adapter that is used in some portable hard drives.
|
521 |
|
|
If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you may
|
522 |
|
|
answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you should
|
523 |
|
|
answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will be
|
524 |
|
|
called fit2.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the type
|
525 |
|
|
of device that you want to support.
|
526 |
|
|
|
527 |
|
|
FIT TD-3000 protocol
|
528 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_FIT3
|
529 |
|
|
This option enables support for the TD-3000 parallel port IDE
|
530 |
|
|
protocol from Fidelity International Technology. This protocol is
|
531 |
|
|
used in newer models of their portable disk, CD-ROM and PD/CD
|
532 |
|
|
devices. If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you
|
533 |
|
|
may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you
|
534 |
|
|
should answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will
|
535 |
|
|
be called fit3.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the
|
536 |
|
|
type of device that you want to support.
|
537 |
|
|
|
538 |
|
|
Freecom IQ ASIC-2 protocol
|
539 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_FRIQ
|
540 |
|
|
This option enables support for version 2 of the Freecom IQ parallel
|
541 |
|
|
port IDE adapter. This adapter is used by the Maxell Superdisk
|
542 |
|
|
drive. If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you
|
543 |
|
|
may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you
|
544 |
|
|
should answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will be
|
545 |
|
|
called friq.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the type
|
546 |
|
|
of device that you want to support.
|
547 |
|
|
|
548 |
|
|
FreeCom power protocol
|
549 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_FRPW
|
550 |
|
|
This option enables support for the Freecom power parallel port IDE
|
551 |
|
|
protocol. If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel,
|
552 |
|
|
you may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you
|
553 |
|
|
should answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will
|
554 |
|
|
be called frpw.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the
|
555 |
|
|
type of device that you want to support.
|
556 |
|
|
|
557 |
|
|
KingByte KBIC-951A/971A protocols
|
558 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_KBIC
|
559 |
|
|
This option enables support for the KBIC-951A and KBIC-971A parallel
|
560 |
|
|
port IDE protocols from KingByte Information Corp. KingByte's
|
561 |
|
|
adapters appear in many no-name portable disk and CD-ROM products,
|
562 |
|
|
especially in Europe. If you chose to build PARIDE support into
|
563 |
|
|
your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver,
|
564 |
|
|
otherwise you should answer M to build it as a loadable module.
|
565 |
|
|
The module will be called kbic.o. You must also have a high-level
|
566 |
|
|
driver for the type of device that you want to support.
|
567 |
|
|
|
568 |
|
|
KT PHd protocol
|
569 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_KTTI
|
570 |
|
|
This option enables support for the "PHd" parallel port IDE protocol
|
571 |
|
|
from KT Technology. This is a simple (low speed) adapter that is
|
572 |
|
|
used in some 2.5" portable hard drives. If you chose to build
|
573 |
|
|
PARIDE support into your kernel, you may answer Y here to build in
|
574 |
|
|
the protocol driver, otherwise you should answer M to build it as a
|
575 |
|
|
loadable module. The module will be called ktti.o. You must also
|
576 |
|
|
have a high-level driver for the type of device that you want to
|
577 |
|
|
support.
|
578 |
|
|
|
579 |
|
|
OnSpec 90c20 protocol
|
580 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_ON20
|
581 |
|
|
This option enables support for the (obsolete) 90c20 parallel port
|
582 |
|
|
IDE protocol from OnSpec (often marketed under the ValuStore brand
|
583 |
|
|
name). If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you
|
584 |
|
|
may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you
|
585 |
|
|
should answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will
|
586 |
|
|
be called on20.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the
|
587 |
|
|
type of device that you want to support.
|
588 |
|
|
|
589 |
|
|
OnSpec 90c26 protocol
|
590 |
|
|
CONFIG_PARIDE_ON26
|
591 |
|
|
This option enables support for the 90c26 parallel port IDE protocol
|
592 |
|
|
from OnSpec Electronics (often marketed under the ValuStore brand
|
593 |
|
|
name). If you chose to build PARIDE support into your kernel, you
|
594 |
|
|
may answer Y here to build in the protocol driver, otherwise you
|
595 |
|
|
should answer M to build it as a loadable module. The module will
|
596 |
|
|
be called on26.o. You must also have a high-level driver for the
|
597 |
|
|
type of device that you want to support.
|
598 |
|
|
|
599 |
|
|
Multiple devices driver support
|
600 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_MD
|
601 |
|
|
This driver lets you combine several hard disk partitions into one
|
602 |
|
|
logical block device. Information about how and why to use it and
|
603 |
|
|
the necessary tools are available over FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
604 |
|
|
sweet-smoke.ufr-info-p7.ibp.fr/pub/public/Linux in the md package
|
605 |
|
|
and the md-FAQ. Please read drivers/block/README.md. If unsure,
|
606 |
|
|
say N.
|
607 |
|
|
|
608 |
|
|
Linear (append) mode
|
609 |
|
|
CONFIG_MD_LINEAR
|
610 |
|
|
If you enable this, then your multiple devices driver will be able
|
611 |
|
|
to use the so-called linear mode, i.e. it will combine the hard disk
|
612 |
|
|
partitions by simply appending one to the other. If you want to
|
613 |
|
|
compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
614 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
615 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. If unsure, say Y.
|
616 |
|
|
|
617 |
|
|
RAID-0 (striping) mode
|
618 |
|
|
CONFIG_MD_STRIPED
|
619 |
|
|
If you enable this, then your multiple devices driver will be able
|
620 |
|
|
to use the so-called raid0 mode, i.e. it will combine the hard disk
|
621 |
|
|
partitions into one logical device in such a fashion as to fill them
|
622 |
|
|
up evenly, one chunk here and one chunk there. This will increase
|
623 |
|
|
the throughput rate if the partitions reside on distinct disks. If
|
624 |
|
|
you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted
|
625 |
|
|
in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M
|
626 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt. If unsure, say Y.
|
627 |
|
|
|
628 |
|
|
RAID-1 (mirroring) mode
|
629 |
|
|
CONFIG_MD_MIRRORING
|
630 |
|
|
A RAID-1 set consists of several disk drives which are exact copies
|
631 |
|
|
of each other. In the event of a mirror failture, the RAID driver
|
632 |
|
|
will continue to use the operational mirrors in the set, providing
|
633 |
|
|
an error free MD device to the higher levels of the kernel. In
|
634 |
|
|
a set with N drives, the available space is the capacity of a single
|
635 |
|
|
drive, and the set protects against a failture of (N - 1) drives.
|
636 |
|
|
raidtools, a set of user-space tools which create and maintain
|
637 |
|
|
RAID1/4/5 sets, is available at:
|
638 |
|
|
http://luthien.nuclecu.unam.mx/~miguel/raid
|
639 |
|
|
|
640 |
|
|
RAID-4/RAID-5 mode
|
641 |
|
|
CONFIG_MD_RAID5
|
642 |
|
|
A RAID-5 set of N drives with a capacity of C MB per drive provides
|
643 |
|
|
the capacity of C * (N - 1) drives, and protects against a failture
|
644 |
|
|
of a single drive. For a given sector (row) number, (N - 1) drives
|
645 |
|
|
contain data sectors, and one drive contains the parity protection.
|
646 |
|
|
For a RAID-4 set, the parity blocks are present on a single drive,
|
647 |
|
|
while a RAID-5 set distributes the parity accross the drives in one
|
648 |
|
|
of the available parity distribution methods.
|
649 |
|
|
raidtools, a set of user-space tools which create and maintain
|
650 |
|
|
RAID1/4/5 sets, is available at:
|
651 |
|
|
http://luthien.nuclecu.unam.mx/~miguel/raid
|
652 |
|
|
|
653 |
|
|
Support for Deskstation RPC44
|
654 |
|
|
CONFIG_DESKSTATION_RPC44
|
655 |
|
|
This is a machine with a R4400 100 MHz CPU. To compile a Linux
|
656 |
|
|
kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For details about Linux on
|
657 |
|
|
the MIPS architecture, check out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at
|
658 |
|
|
http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the WWW, you need to have access
|
659 |
|
|
to a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
660 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic).
|
661 |
|
|
|
662 |
|
|
Support for Mips Magnum 3000
|
663 |
|
|
CONFIG_MIPS_MAGNUM_3000
|
664 |
|
|
To compile a Linux kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For
|
665 |
|
|
details about Linux on the MIPS architecture, check out the
|
666 |
|
|
Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the
|
667 |
|
|
WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has
|
668 |
|
|
one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic).
|
669 |
|
|
|
670 |
|
|
Support for Mips Magnum 4000
|
671 |
|
|
CONFIG_MIPS_MAGNUM_4000
|
672 |
|
|
This is a machine with a R4000 100 MHz CPU. To compile a Linux
|
673 |
|
|
kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For details about Linux on
|
674 |
|
|
the MIPS architecture, check out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at
|
675 |
|
|
http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the WWW, you need to have access
|
676 |
|
|
to a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
677 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic).
|
678 |
|
|
|
679 |
|
|
Support for Olivetti M700
|
680 |
|
|
CONFIG_OLIVETTI_M700
|
681 |
|
|
This is a machine with a R4000 100 MHz CPU. To compile a Linux
|
682 |
|
|
kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For details about Linux on
|
683 |
|
|
the MIPS architecture, check out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at
|
684 |
|
|
http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the WWW, you need to have access
|
685 |
|
|
to a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
686 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic).
|
687 |
|
|
|
688 |
|
|
Support for Deskstation Tyne
|
689 |
|
|
CONFIG_DESKSTATION_TYNE
|
690 |
|
|
This is a machine with a R4600 134 MHz CPU. The Linux port for this
|
691 |
|
|
system is idle right now because of hardware or documentation
|
692 |
|
|
problems. For details about Linux on the MIPS architecture, check
|
693 |
|
|
out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse
|
694 |
|
|
the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that
|
695 |
|
|
has one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic).
|
696 |
|
|
|
697 |
|
|
Support for Acer PICA 1 chipset
|
698 |
|
|
CONFIG_ACER_PICA_61
|
699 |
|
|
This is a machine with a R4400 134/150 MHz CPU. To compile a Linux
|
700 |
|
|
kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For details about Linux on
|
701 |
|
|
the MIPS architecture, check out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at
|
702 |
|
|
http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the WWW, you need to have access
|
703 |
|
|
to a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
704 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic).
|
705 |
|
|
|
706 |
|
|
Support for DECstation
|
707 |
|
|
CONFIG_DECSTATION
|
708 |
|
|
The DECStation 3100 (with a MIPS R2000 series CPU) and DECStation
|
709 |
|
|
5000/xxx (MIPS R3000 series CPU) are also sometimes labeled PMAX.
|
710 |
|
|
They often run the Ultrix operating system. To compile a Linux
|
711 |
|
|
kernel that runs on these, say Y here. For details about Linux on
|
712 |
|
|
the MIPS architecture, check out the Linux/MIPS FAQ on the WWW at
|
713 |
|
|
http://lena.fnet.fr/ (To browse the WWW, you need to have access
|
714 |
|
|
to a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
715 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic).
|
716 |
|
|
|
717 |
|
|
CPU type
|
718 |
|
|
CONFIG_CPU_R3000
|
719 |
|
|
Give the type of your machine's MIPS CPU. For this question, it
|
720 |
|
|
suffices to give a unique prefix of the option you want to choose.
|
721 |
|
|
|
722 |
|
|
Networking support
|
723 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET
|
724 |
|
|
Unless you really know what you are doing, you should say Y here.
|
725 |
|
|
The reason is that some programs need it even if you configure a
|
726 |
|
|
stand-alone machine that won't be connected to any other computer.
|
727 |
|
|
from an older kernel, you should consider updating your networking
|
728 |
|
|
tools too; read net/README for details.
|
729 |
|
|
|
730 |
|
|
Network aliasing
|
731 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_ALIAS
|
732 |
|
|
This is for setting multiple IP addresses on the same low-level
|
733 |
|
|
network device driver. Typically used for services that act
|
734 |
|
|
differently based on the address they listen on (e.g. "multihosting"
|
735 |
|
|
on Apache httpd) or for connecting to different logical networks
|
736 |
|
|
through the same physical interface. This is the generic part,
|
737 |
|
|
later when configuring network protocol options you will be asked
|
738 |
|
|
for protocol-specific aliasing support. See
|
739 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/alias.txt for more info. If you need this
|
740 |
|
|
feature (for any protocol, like IP) say Y; if unsure, say N.
|
741 |
|
|
|
742 |
|
|
Network firewalls
|
743 |
|
|
CONFIG_FIREWALL
|
744 |
|
|
A firewall is a computer which protects a local network from the
|
745 |
|
|
rest of the World: all traffic to and from computers on the local
|
746 |
|
|
net is inspected by the firewall first. If you want to configure
|
747 |
|
|
your Linux box as a firewall for a local network, say Y here. If
|
748 |
|
|
your local network is TCP/IP based, you will have to say Y to "IP:
|
749 |
|
|
firewalling", below. You also need to say Y here and enable "IP
|
750 |
|
|
firewalling" below in order to be able to use IP masquerading
|
751 |
|
|
(i.e. local computers can chat with an outside host, but that
|
752 |
|
|
outside host is made to think that it is talking to the firewall
|
753 |
|
|
box. Makes the local network completely invisible and avoids the
|
754 |
|
|
need to allocate valid IP host addresses for the machines on the
|
755 |
|
|
local net) or to use the ip packet accounting to see what is using
|
756 |
|
|
all your network bandwidth. Chances are that you should use this on
|
757 |
|
|
any machine being run as a router and not on a host.
|
758 |
|
|
If unsure, say N.
|
759 |
|
|
|
760 |
|
|
SYN flood protection
|
761 |
|
|
CONFIG_SYN_COOKIES
|
762 |
|
|
Normal TCP/IP networking is open to an attack known as SYN flooding.
|
763 |
|
|
This attack prevents legitimate users from being able to connect to
|
764 |
|
|
your computer and requires very little work for the attacker.
|
765 |
|
|
SYN cookies provide protection against this type of attack. With
|
766 |
|
|
this option turned on the TCP/IP stack will use a cryptographic
|
767 |
|
|
challenge protocol known as SYN cookies to enable legitimate users
|
768 |
|
|
to continue to connect, even when your machine is under attack.
|
769 |
|
|
If you are SYN flooded, the source address reported by the kernel is
|
770 |
|
|
likely to have been forged by the attacker. The source address is
|
771 |
|
|
reported as an aid in tracing the packets to their actual source.
|
772 |
|
|
|
773 |
|
|
Sun floppy controller support
|
774 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_SUNFD
|
775 |
|
|
This is support for floppy drives on Sun SPARC workstations. Say Y
|
776 |
|
|
if you have a floppy drive, otherwise N. Easy.
|
777 |
|
|
|
778 |
|
|
Alpha system type
|
779 |
|
|
CONFIG_ALPHA_AVANTI
|
780 |
|
|
Find out what type of Alpha motherboard you have. You will probably
|
781 |
|
|
want to read the Linux/Alpha home page on the WWW at
|
782 |
|
|
http://www.azstarnet.com/~axplinux/ (To browse the WWW, you need to
|
783 |
|
|
have access to a machine on the Internet that has one of the
|
784 |
|
|
programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). For this question, it suffices
|
785 |
|
|
to give a unique prefix of the option you want to choose. The
|
786 |
|
|
choices:
|
787 |
|
|
** Avanti: This is for Mustang (AS200), M3 (AS250), Avanti (AS400)
|
788 |
|
|
and XL (a.k.a. "Windows NT Dream Machine" :-) AlphaStations.
|
789 |
|
|
These usually come with a TGA graphics adapter, so you'll want to
|
790 |
|
|
say Y to "TGA Console support", below, if you have one of these.
|
791 |
|
|
** Jensen: a.k.a. DEC 2000 a.k.a. DECpc AXP 150, the oldest Alpha
|
792 |
|
|
PC; it sports an EISA bus. The boot process on Jensen machines is
|
793 |
|
|
difficult (no booting from floppies, MILO doesn't work). You need
|
794 |
|
|
to have access to a second Linux workstation. The Linux/Alpha
|
795 |
|
|
FAQ, accessible from the above mentioned WWW page, has details.
|
796 |
|
|
** Noname: a.k.a. AXPpci33, a PCI-bus based board using the 21066
|
797 |
|
|
Alpha CPU, running at either 166 or 233 MHz. You also want to
|
798 |
|
|
choose this option if you have a UDB (Universal Desktop Box
|
799 |
|
|
a.k.a. Multia) machine.
|
800 |
|
|
** Cabriolet: also called AlphaPC64, a PCI-bus based board using the
|
801 |
|
|
21064 Alpha CPU typically running at 275 or 300 MHz.
|
802 |
|
|
** EB66: "Evaluation Board"
|
803 |
|
|
** EB66+: "Evaluation Board"
|
804 |
|
|
###
|
805 |
|
|
### Add info about Platform2000, EB164
|
806 |
|
|
###
|
807 |
|
|
|
808 |
|
|
Is it really a true XL
|
809 |
|
|
CONFIG_ALPHA_XL
|
810 |
|
|
If your Avanti Machine is of type XL (a.k.a. "Windows NT Dream
|
811 |
|
|
Machine") (as opposed to Mustang (AS200), M3 (AS250) or Avanti
|
812 |
|
|
(AS400)), say Y, otherwise N.
|
813 |
|
|
|
814 |
|
|
Limit memory to low 16MB
|
815 |
|
|
CONFIG_MAX_16M
|
816 |
|
|
This is for some buggy motherboards which cannot properly deal with
|
817 |
|
|
the memory above 16MB. If you have more than 16MB of RAM and
|
818 |
|
|
experience weird problems, you might want to try Y, everyone else
|
819 |
|
|
says N. Note for machines with more that 64MB of RAM: in order for
|
820 |
|
|
the kernel to be able to use the memory above 64MB, pass the command
|
821 |
|
|
line option "mem=XXXM" (where XXX is the memory size in megabytes)
|
822 |
|
|
to your kernel during boot time. See the documentation of your boot
|
823 |
|
|
loader (lilo or loadlin) about how to pass options to the kernel.
|
824 |
|
|
The lilo procedure is also explained in the SCSI-HOWTO, available
|
825 |
|
|
via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
826 |
|
|
You also need at least 512kB of RAM cache if you have more than 64MB
|
827 |
|
|
of RAM. Some other things to try when experiencing seemingly random,
|
828 |
|
|
"weird" problems: 1) passing the "no-hlt" option to the kernel
|
829 |
|
|
2) passing the "no-387" option to the kernel 3) passing the "mem=4M"
|
830 |
|
|
option to the kernel (thereby disabling all but the first 4M of RAM)
|
831 |
|
|
4) disabling the cache from your BIOS settings
|
832 |
|
|
5) exchanging RAM chips 6) exchanging the motherboard.
|
833 |
|
|
|
834 |
|
|
Using SRM as bootloader
|
835 |
|
|
CONFIG_ALPHA_SRM
|
836 |
|
|
There are two different types of booting firmware on Alphas: SRM,
|
837 |
|
|
which is command line driven, and ARC, which uses menus and arrow
|
838 |
|
|
keys. The usual way to load Linux on an Alpha machine is to use MILO
|
839 |
|
|
(a bootloader that lets you pass command line parameters to the
|
840 |
|
|
kernel just like LILO does) which can be loaded either from ARC or
|
841 |
|
|
can be installed directly as a permanent firmware replacement from
|
842 |
|
|
floppy (which requires changing a certain jumper on the
|
843 |
|
|
motherboard). If you want to do either of these, say N here. If MILO
|
844 |
|
|
doesn't work on your system (true for Jensen motherboards), you can
|
845 |
|
|
bypass it altogether and boot Linux directly from an SRM console;
|
846 |
|
|
say Y here in order to do that. Note that you won't be able to boot
|
847 |
|
|
from an IDE disk using SRM. If unsure, say N. Details about the
|
848 |
|
|
Linux/Alpha booting process are contained in the Linux/Alpha FAQ,
|
849 |
|
|
accessible on the WWW from http://www.azstarnet.com/~axplinux/ (To
|
850 |
|
|
browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet
|
851 |
|
|
that has one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic).
|
852 |
|
|
|
853 |
|
|
Echo console messages on /dev/ttyS1
|
854 |
|
|
CONFIG_SERIAL_ECHO
|
855 |
|
|
If you enable this option, all kernel messages that would usually go
|
856 |
|
|
to the console will also be sent to the device /dev/ttyS1 which
|
857 |
|
|
corresponds to a serial port; this could be useful if you attached
|
858 |
|
|
a terminal or printer to that port.
|
859 |
|
|
|
860 |
|
|
TGA Console Support
|
861 |
|
|
CONFIG_TGA_CONSOLE
|
862 |
|
|
Many Alpha systems (e.g the Multia) are shipped with a graphics card
|
863 |
|
|
that implements the TGA interface (much like the VGA standard, but
|
864 |
|
|
older TGA adapters are *not* VGA compatible). On such systems, this
|
865 |
|
|
option needs to be enabled so that the TGA driver rather than the
|
866 |
|
|
standard VGA driver is used. Note that, at this time, there is no X
|
867 |
|
|
server for these systems. If unsure, try N.
|
868 |
|
|
|
869 |
|
|
PCI bios support
|
870 |
|
|
CONFIG_PCI
|
871 |
|
|
Find out whether you have a PCI motherboard. PCI is the name of a
|
872 |
|
|
bus system, i.e. the way the CPU talks to the other stuff inside
|
873 |
|
|
your box. Other bus systems are ISA, EISA, Microchannel (MCA) or
|
874 |
|
|
VESA. If you have PCI, say Y, otherwise N. Note1: MCA systems
|
875 |
|
|
(notably some IBM PS/2's) are not supported by the standard kernels,
|
876 |
|
|
but patches exist at
|
877 |
|
|
http://www.undergrad.math.uwaterloo.ca/~cpbeaure/mca-linux.html on
|
878 |
|
|
the WWW. Note2: some old PCI motherboards have BIOS bugs and may
|
879 |
|
|
crash if "PCI bios support" is enabled (but they run fine without
|
880 |
|
|
this option). The PCI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
881 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, contains valuable information
|
882 |
|
|
about which PCI hardware does work under Linux and which doesn't.
|
883 |
|
|
If some of your PCI devices don't work and you get a warning during
|
884 |
|
|
boot time ("man dmesg"), please follow the instructions at the top
|
885 |
|
|
of include/linux/pci.h.
|
886 |
|
|
|
887 |
|
|
PCI bridge optimization (experimental)
|
888 |
|
|
CONFIG_PCI_OPTIMIZE
|
889 |
|
|
This can improve access times for some hardware devices under
|
890 |
|
|
certain BIOSes if your computer uses a PCI bus system. This is
|
891 |
|
|
recommended; say Y.
|
892 |
|
|
|
893 |
|
|
Generic IDE (U)DMA support
|
894 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_TRITON
|
895 |
|
|
If your PCI system uses an EIDE hard disk (as opposed to SCSI, say)
|
896 |
|
|
and includes one of the Intel (U)DMA IDE Southbridge ICs (i82371FB,
|
897 |
|
|
i82371SB or i82371AB), you will want to enable this option to allow
|
898 |
|
|
use of bus-mastering DMA data transfers. This increases transfer
|
899 |
|
|
rates and reduces latencies and CPU utilization. Read the comments in
|
900 |
|
|
Documentation/ide.txt and Documentation/udma.txt.
|
901 |
|
|
Check the file Documentation/Changes for location and latest version
|
902 |
|
|
of the hdparm utility. There are now several more chipsets added, to
|
903 |
|
|
include offboard PCI-IDE-UDMA cards and newer SiS and VIA chipsets.
|
904 |
|
|
It is safe to say Y to this question, as long as your PCI bus is
|
905 |
|
|
operating within specs (33MHz recommended).
|
906 |
|
|
|
907 |
|
|
Boot off-board chipsets first support
|
908 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_OFFBOARD
|
909 |
|
|
Normally, IDE controllers built into the motherboard (on-board
|
910 |
|
|
controllers) are assigned to ide0 and ide1 while those on add-in
|
911 |
|
|
PCI cards (off-board controllers) are relegated to ide2 and ide3.
|
912 |
|
|
Saying Y to here will reverse the situation, with off-board
|
913 |
|
|
controllers on ide0/1 and on-board controllers on ide2/3. This
|
914 |
|
|
can improve the usability of some boot managers such as LILO
|
915 |
|
|
when booting from a drive on an off-board controller.
|
916 |
|
|
Note that this will rearrange the order of the hd* devices and
|
917 |
|
|
may require modification of fstab and other files.
|
918 |
|
|
Check the file Documentation/udma.txt
|
919 |
|
|
If in doubt, say N.
|
920 |
|
|
|
921 |
|
|
System V IPC
|
922 |
|
|
CONFIG_SYSVIPC
|
923 |
|
|
Inter Process Communication is a suite of library functions and
|
924 |
|
|
system calls which let processes ( = running programs) synchronize
|
925 |
|
|
and exchange information. It is generally considered to be a good
|
926 |
|
|
thing, and some programs won't run unless you enable this. In
|
927 |
|
|
particular, if you want to run the DOS emulator dosemu under Linux
|
928 |
|
|
(read the DOSEMU-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
929 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO), you'll need to say Y here.
|
930 |
|
|
You can find documentation about IPC in ipc.info, which is contained
|
931 |
|
|
in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/man/info.tar.gz (extract with
|
932 |
|
|
"tar xzvf filename"). These docs are in the info format which is
|
933 |
|
|
used to document GNU software and can be read from within emacs
|
934 |
|
|
("Ctrl-h i") or with the program info ("man info"). Enabling this
|
935 |
|
|
option enlarges your kernel by about 7kB. Just say Y.
|
936 |
|
|
|
937 |
|
|
Kernel support for ELF binaries
|
938 |
|
|
CONFIG_BINFMT_ELF
|
939 |
|
|
ELF (Executable and Linkable Format) is a format for libraries and
|
940 |
|
|
executables used across different architectures and operating
|
941 |
|
|
systems. This option will enable your kernel to run ELF binaries and
|
942 |
|
|
enlarge it by about 2kB. ELF support under Linux is quickly
|
943 |
|
|
replacing the traditional Linux a.out formats (QMAGIC and ZMAGIC)
|
944 |
|
|
because it is portable (this does *not* mean that you will be able
|
945 |
|
|
to run executables from different architectures or operating
|
946 |
|
|
systems!) and makes building run-time libraries very easy. Many new
|
947 |
|
|
executables are distributed solely in ELF format. You definitely
|
948 |
|
|
want to say Y here. Information about ELF is on the WWW at
|
949 |
|
|
http://www.sjc.ox.ac.uk/users/barlow/elf-howto.html (To browse the
|
950 |
|
|
WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has
|
951 |
|
|
one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). If you find that
|
952 |
|
|
after upgrading to Linux kernel 1.3 and saying Y here, you still
|
953 |
|
|
can't run any ELF binaries (they just crash), then you'll have to
|
954 |
|
|
install the newest ELF runtime libraries, including ld.so (check the
|
955 |
|
|
file Documentation/Changes for location and latest version). If you
|
956 |
|
|
want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in
|
957 |
|
|
and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here
|
958 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt. Saying M or N here is dangerous
|
959 |
|
|
because some crucial programs on your system might be in ELF format.
|
960 |
|
|
|
961 |
|
|
Compile kernel as ELF -- if your GCC is ELF-GCC
|
962 |
|
|
CONFIG_KERNEL_ELF
|
963 |
|
|
The gcc version 2.7.0 and newer produces the new ELF binary format
|
964 |
|
|
as default. If you have such a compiler (try "gcc -v"), say Y here,
|
965 |
|
|
otherwise N.
|
966 |
|
|
It is possible, albeit almost pointless, to compile the kernel in
|
967 |
|
|
a.out (i.e. QMAGIC) format even if your compiler produces ELF as
|
968 |
|
|
default. For that, you would have to say N here and change the
|
969 |
|
|
variables LD and CC in the toplevel Makefile. Similarly, if your
|
970 |
|
|
compiler produces a.out by default but is able to produce ELF, you
|
971 |
|
|
can compile the kernel in ELF by saying Y here and editing the
|
972 |
|
|
variables CC and LD in the toplevel Makefile.
|
973 |
|
|
|
974 |
|
|
Kernel support for A.OUT binaries
|
975 |
|
|
CONFIG_BINFMT_AOUT
|
976 |
|
|
A.out (Assembler.OUTput) is a set of formats for libraries and
|
977 |
|
|
executables used in the earliest versions of UNIX. Linux used the
|
978 |
|
|
a.out formats QMAGIC and ZMAGIC until they were replaced with the
|
979 |
|
|
ELF format.
|
980 |
|
|
As more and more programs are converted to ELF, the use for a.out
|
981 |
|
|
will gradually diminish. If you disable this option it will reduce
|
982 |
|
|
your kernel by one page. This is not much and by itself does not
|
983 |
|
|
warrant removing support. However its removal is a good idea if you
|
984 |
|
|
wish to ensure that absolutely none of your programs will use this
|
985 |
|
|
older executable format. If you don't know what to answer at this
|
986 |
|
|
point then answer Y. If someone told you "You need a kernel with
|
987 |
|
|
QMAGIC support" then you'll have to say Y here. You may answer M
|
988 |
|
|
to compile a.out support as a module and later load the module when
|
989 |
|
|
you want to use a program or library in a.out format. Saying M or N
|
990 |
|
|
here is dangerous though, because some crucial programs on your
|
991 |
|
|
system might still be in A.OUT format.
|
992 |
|
|
|
993 |
|
|
Kernel support for JAVA binaries
|
994 |
|
|
CONFIG_BINFMT_JAVA
|
995 |
|
|
JAVA is an object oriented programming language developed by SUN;
|
996 |
|
|
JAVA programs are compiled into "JAVA bytecode" which can then be
|
997 |
|
|
interpreted by run time systems on many different operating systems.
|
998 |
|
|
These JAVA binaries are becoming a universal executable format. This
|
999 |
|
|
option allows you to run a Java binary just like any other Linux
|
1000 |
|
|
program: by typing in its name. As more and more Java programs
|
1001 |
|
|
become available, the use for this will gradually increase. You can
|
1002 |
|
|
even execute HTML files containing JAVA applets ( = JAVA binaries)
|
1003 |
|
|
if those files start with the string "". If you want to
|
1004 |
|
|
use this, read Documentation/java.txt and the Java on Linux HOWTO,
|
1005 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1006 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. You will then need to install
|
1007 |
|
|
the run time system contained in the Java Developers Kit (JDK) as
|
1008 |
|
|
described in the HOWTO. If you disable this option it will reduce
|
1009 |
|
|
your kernel by about 4kB. This is not much and by itself does not
|
1010 |
|
|
warrant removing support. However its removal is a good idea if you
|
1011 |
|
|
do not have the JDK installed. If you don't know what to answer at
|
1012 |
|
|
this point then answer Y. You may answer M for module support and
|
1013 |
|
|
later load the module when you install the JDK or find an
|
1014 |
|
|
interesting Java program that you can't live without.
|
1015 |
|
|
|
1016 |
|
|
Processor type
|
1017 |
|
|
CONFIG_M68000
|
1018 |
|
|
This is the exact processor type of your M68K CPU. It is used to choose
|
1019 |
|
|
which platforms (the hardware connected to the CPU) may be selected. Only
|
1020 |
|
|
one processor can be chosen, and this must be the appropriate type for
|
1021 |
|
|
that platform.
|
1022 |
|
|
|
1023 |
|
|
Build for the Rt-Control, Inc uC68EZ328 uCsimm
|
1024 |
|
|
CONFIG_UCSIMM
|
1025 |
|
|
The uCsimm model uC68EZ328 embedded control system on a SIMM stick.
|
1026 |
|
|
Make sure to say yes to ROM disk (BLKMEM), ROMfs and cs8900 ethernet
|
1027 |
|
|
as well to take advantage of the unique features of the device.
|
1028 |
|
|
Online documentation is available at http://www.rt-control.com
|
1029 |
|
|
|
1030 |
|
|
Build for the PalmIII and predecessors
|
1031 |
|
|
CONFIG_PILOT
|
1032 |
|
|
The PalmIII (and its previous versions, the Pilot 1000, Pilot 5000,
|
1033 |
|
|
PalmPilot Personal, and PalmPilot Professional) is a PDA manufactured by
|
1034 |
|
|
Palm Computing, Inc. (A subsidiary of U.S. Robotics, itself a subsidiary
|
1035 |
|
|
of 3Com.) The PalmIII contains a Motorola 68328, and minimal hardware to
|
1036 |
|
|
support battery operation, serial port, RAM/ROM expansion, and a touch
|
1037 |
|
|
screen. The PalmIII version includes an IR interface.
|
1038 |
|
|
To compile for this target, you must not choose any other targets,
|
1039 |
|
|
and you must choose the M68328 processor.
|
1040 |
|
|
|
1041 |
|
|
Build for the SHGLCORE
|
1042 |
|
|
CONFIG_SHGLCORE
|
1043 |
|
|
The Silver Hammer Group, Ltd., originally developed hardware running
|
1044 |
|
|
uClinux, aport of Linux to non-MMU targets (and the 68K family of non-MMU
|
1045 |
|
|
targets, in particular). The SHGLCORE is a development target using the
|
1046 |
|
|
Motorola 68332. This option needs to become a generic 68332 target, you
|
1047 |
|
|
likely want to say no here as there were only a handful of SHGLCORE boards
|
1048 |
|
|
built.
|
1049 |
|
|
|
1050 |
|
|
Build for Motorola M68EZ328 Development board
|
1051 |
|
|
CONFIG_M68EZ328ADS
|
1052 |
|
|
M68EZ328ADS board is a reference design board from Motorola, based on
|
1053 |
|
|
Dragonball EZ (MC68EZ328) CPU. It has 4MB DRAM, 2MB FLASH and 256K SRAM
|
1054 |
|
|
(which uClinux does not use). It also has a separate 68681 dual serial
|
1055 |
|
|
port which is very instrumental fro debugging 68328 serial driver.
|
1056 |
|
|
|
1057 |
|
|
Build for Motorola M68EZ328 Development board (DRAM version)
|
1058 |
|
|
CONFIG_M68EZ328ADS_RAM
|
1059 |
|
|
It is possible to build a kernel that will run from DRAM instead of FLASH.
|
1060 |
|
|
This is useful during kernel development, since it eliminates the need to
|
1061 |
|
|
reprogram FLASH every time. It assumes that the ROM disk image is located
|
1062 |
|
|
in the beinning of the FLASH.
|
1063 |
|
|
|
1064 |
|
|
Build for Alma Electronics board
|
1065 |
|
|
CONFIG_ALMA_ANS
|
1066 |
|
|
Alma Electronics developed a board, based on MC68EZ328. It has 2 MB DRAM,
|
1067 |
|
|
2 MB FLASH, cs8900 Ethernet and DW16500 chip by DSP Group, connected to
|
1068 |
|
|
the CPU via SPI interface.
|
1069 |
|
|
|
1070 |
|
|
Build for Alma Electronics board (DRAM version)
|
1071 |
|
|
CONFIG_ALMA_ANS_RAM
|
1072 |
|
|
It is possible to build a kernel that will run from DRAM instead of FLASH.
|
1073 |
|
|
This is useful during kernel development, since it eliminates the need to
|
1074 |
|
|
reprogram FLASH every time. It assumes that the ROM disk image is located
|
1075 |
|
|
in the beinning of the FLASH.
|
1076 |
|
|
|
1077 |
|
|
Reduce memory footprint
|
1078 |
|
|
CONFIG_REDUCE_MEMORY
|
1079 |
|
|
This option reduces a number of tunable settings to make the Linux
|
1080 |
|
|
kernel take up less memory at run-time. This setting is not recommended
|
1081 |
|
|
in a desktop environment, but should not damage anything.
|
1082 |
|
|
|
1083 |
|
|
Processor type
|
1084 |
|
|
CONFIG_M386
|
1085 |
|
|
This is the processor type of your CPU. It is used for optimizing
|
1086 |
|
|
purposes. In order to compile a kernel that can run on all CPU
|
1087 |
|
|
types (albeit not optimally fast), you can specify "386" here. If
|
1088 |
|
|
you specify "486" or "Pentium" or "PPro", then the kernel will run
|
1089 |
|
|
on all of these CPUs: 486 and Pentium (=586) and Pentium Pro (=686).
|
1090 |
|
|
Here are the settings recommended for greatest speed:
|
1091 |
|
|
- "386" for the AMD/Cyrix/Intel 386DX/DXL/SL/SLC/SX and
|
1092 |
|
|
Cyrix/TI 486DLC/DLC2. Only "386" kernels will run on a 386 class
|
1093 |
|
|
machine.
|
1094 |
|
|
- "486" for the AMD/Cyrix/IBM/Intel DX4 or 486DX/DX2/SL/SX/SX2,
|
1095 |
|
|
AMD/Cyrix 5x86, NexGen Nx586 and UMC U5D or U5S
|
1096 |
|
|
- "Pentium" for the AMD K5, K6 and K6-3D, Cyrix MediaGX,
|
1097 |
|
|
Cyrix/IBM/National Semiconductor 6x86 and GXm, IDT Centaur
|
1098 |
|
|
WinChip C6, and Intel Pentium/Pentium MMX
|
1099 |
|
|
- "PPro" for the Cyrix/IBM/National Semiconductor 6x86MX, MII and
|
1100 |
|
|
Intel Pentium II/Pentium Pro
|
1101 |
|
|
In rare cases, it can make sense to specify "Pentium" even if
|
1102 |
|
|
running a 486: the kernel will be smaller but slightly slower. On
|
1103 |
|
|
the other hand, if you use a compiler before gcc 2.7 (say "gcc -v"
|
1104 |
|
|
to find out), then you have to say "386" or "486" here even if
|
1105 |
|
|
running on a Pentium or PPro machine.
|
1106 |
|
|
|
1107 |
|
|
If you don't know what to do, say "386".
|
1108 |
|
|
|
1109 |
|
|
Compile the kernel into the ELF object format
|
1110 |
|
|
CONFIG_ELF_KERNEL
|
1111 |
|
|
ELF (Executable and Linkable Format) is a format for libraries and
|
1112 |
|
|
executables used across different architectures and operating
|
1113 |
|
|
systems. This option will cause the resulting kernel to be in ELF
|
1114 |
|
|
format, which is generally desirable, so say Y. However, it only
|
1115 |
|
|
works if your compiler and linker can produce ELF code.
|
1116 |
|
|
|
1117 |
|
|
Is your ELF compiler an extra compiler
|
1118 |
|
|
CONFIG_EXTRA_ELF_COMPILER
|
1119 |
|
|
If you have a linuxelf-gcc as opposed to linux-gcc, say Y,
|
1120 |
|
|
otherwise N.
|
1121 |
|
|
|
1122 |
|
|
Generate little endian code
|
1123 |
|
|
CONFIG_CPU_LITTLE_ENDIAN
|
1124 |
|
|
If your compiler is mipsel-linux-gcc or mipsel-linuxelf-gcc (as
|
1125 |
|
|
opposed to mips-linux-gcc or mips-linuxelf-gcc), say Y here,
|
1126 |
|
|
otherwise N. Most MIPS machines use little-endian code, but it might
|
1127 |
|
|
be necessary to run older Mips systems, such as the Sony News and
|
1128 |
|
|
MIPS RC3xxx, in big endian mode.
|
1129 |
|
|
|
1130 |
|
|
Enable loadable module support
|
1131 |
|
|
CONFIG_MODULES
|
1132 |
|
|
Kernel modules are small pieces of compiled code which can be
|
1133 |
|
|
inserted in or removed from the running kernel, using the
|
1134 |
|
|
programs insmod and rmmod. This is described in the file
|
1135 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. Modules can be device drivers, file
|
1136 |
|
|
systems, binary executable formats, and so on. If you think that
|
1137 |
|
|
you may want to make use of modules with this kernel in the future,
|
1138 |
|
|
then say Y here. If unsure, say Y.
|
1139 |
|
|
|
1140 |
|
|
Set version information on all symbols for modules
|
1141 |
|
|
CONFIG_MODVERSIONS
|
1142 |
|
|
Usually, modules have to be recompiled whenever you switch to a new
|
1143 |
|
|
kernel. Enabling this option makes it possible, and safe, to use
|
1144 |
|
|
the same modules even after compiling a new kernel; this requires
|
1145 |
|
|
the program modprobe. All the software needed for module support is
|
1146 |
|
|
in the modules package (check the file Documentation/Changes for
|
1147 |
|
|
location and latest version). NOTE: if you say Y here but don't
|
1148 |
|
|
have the program genksyms (which is also contained in the above
|
1149 |
|
|
mentioned modules package), then the building of your kernel will
|
1150 |
|
|
fail. If you are going to use modules that are generated from
|
1151 |
|
|
non-kernel sources, you would benefit from this option. Otherwise
|
1152 |
|
|
it's not that important. So, N ought to be a safe bet.
|
1153 |
|
|
|
1154 |
|
|
Kernel daemon support
|
1155 |
|
|
CONFIG_KERNELD
|
1156 |
|
|
Normally when you have selected some drivers and/or filesystems to
|
1157 |
|
|
be created as loadable modules, you also have the responsibility to
|
1158 |
|
|
load the corresponding module (via insmod/modprobe) before you can
|
1159 |
|
|
use it. If you select Y here, the kernel will take care of this all
|
1160 |
|
|
by itself, together with the user level daemon "kerneld". Note that
|
1161 |
|
|
"kerneld" will also automatically unload all unused modules, so you
|
1162 |
|
|
don't have to use "rmmod" either.
|
1163 |
|
|
kerneld will also provide support for different user-level beeper
|
1164 |
|
|
and screen blanker programs later on.
|
1165 |
|
|
The "kerneld" daemon is included in the package "modules-1.2.8" and
|
1166 |
|
|
later. You will probably want to read the kerneld mini-HOWTO,
|
1167 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
1168 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. If unsure, say Y.
|
1169 |
|
|
|
1170 |
|
|
ARP daemon support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1171 |
|
|
CONFIG_ARPD
|
1172 |
|
|
Normally, the kernel maintains an internal cache which maps IP
|
1173 |
|
|
addresses to hardware addresses on the local network, so that
|
1174 |
|
|
Ethernet/Token Ring/ etc. frames are sent to the proper address on
|
1175 |
|
|
the physical networking layer. For small networks having a few
|
1176 |
|
|
hundred directly connected hosts or less, keeping this address
|
1177 |
|
|
resolution (ARP) cache inside the kernel works well. However,
|
1178 |
|
|
maintaining an internal ARP cache does not work well for very large
|
1179 |
|
|
switched networks, and will use a lot of kernel memory if TCP/IP
|
1180 |
|
|
connections are made to many machines on the network. By enabling
|
1181 |
|
|
this option, the kernel's internal ARP cache will never grow to more
|
1182 |
|
|
than 256 entries (the oldest entries are expired in a LIFO manner)
|
1183 |
|
|
and communication will be attempted with an external ARP daemon,
|
1184 |
|
|
arpd. This code is still experimental. If you do enable arpd
|
1185 |
|
|
support, you should obtain a copy of arpd from
|
1186 |
|
|
http://www.loran.com/~layes/arpd/index.html. If unsure, say N.
|
1187 |
|
|
|
1188 |
|
|
TCP/IP networking
|
1189 |
|
|
CONFIG_INET
|
1190 |
|
|
These are the protocols used on the Internet and on most local
|
1191 |
|
|
Ethernets. The safest is to say Y here (which will enlarge your
|
1192 |
|
|
kernel by about 35 kB), since some programs (e.g. the X window
|
1193 |
|
|
system) use TCP/IP even if your machine is not connected to any
|
1194 |
|
|
other computer. You will get the so-called loopback device which
|
1195 |
|
|
allows you to ping yourself (great fun, that!). This option is also
|
1196 |
|
|
necessary if you want to use the full power of term (term is a
|
1197 |
|
|
program which gives you almost full Internet connectivity if you
|
1198 |
|
|
have a regular dial up shell account on some Internet connected Unix
|
1199 |
|
|
computer. Read the Term-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
1200 |
|
|
on sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO). Short answer: say Y.
|
1201 |
|
|
|
1202 |
|
|
IP: forwarding/gatewaying
|
1203 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_FORWARD
|
1204 |
|
|
People who want to use their Linux box as the router for a local
|
1205 |
|
|
network (i.e. the computer responsible for distributing Internet
|
1206 |
|
|
traffic to and from the machines in the local network and the
|
1207 |
|
|
subnetworks) should say Y here (thereby enlarging their kernel by
|
1208 |
|
|
about 5 kB). Note that in this case, you possibly have two Ethernet
|
1209 |
|
|
devices in your computer: one for the "outside world" and one for
|
1210 |
|
|
your local net. The kernel is not able to recognize both at boot
|
1211 |
|
|
time without help; for details read the
|
1212 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
1213 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. If your box is
|
1214 |
|
|
connected to two networks, it may still make sense to say N here,
|
1215 |
|
|
namely if you want to turn your box into a firewall protecting a
|
1216 |
|
|
local network from the Internet. The Firewall-HOWTO tells you how to
|
1217 |
|
|
do this. If your setup is more complex, say you are connected to
|
1218 |
|
|
three networks and you want to act as a firewall between two of them
|
1219 |
|
|
and route traffic for the others, you need to say Y here and enable
|
1220 |
|
|
IP firewalling below. If you intend to use IP masquerading (i.e. IP
|
1221 |
|
|
traffic from one of the local computers and destined for an outside
|
1222 |
|
|
host is changed by your box so that it appears to come from you),
|
1223 |
|
|
you'll have to say Y here and also to IP firewalling and IP
|
1224 |
|
|
masquerading below. You should also say Y here if you want to
|
1225 |
|
|
configure your box as a SLIP (the protocol for sending internet
|
1226 |
|
|
traffic over telephone lines) or PPP (a better SLIP) server for
|
1227 |
|
|
other people to dial into and your box is connected to a local
|
1228 |
|
|
network at the same time. You would then most likely use proxy-ARP
|
1229 |
|
|
(Address Resolution Protocol), explained in the Proxy-Arp mini howto
|
1230 |
|
|
on sunsite in /pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. You also need to say Y
|
1231 |
|
|
here if you want to run mrouted in order to do multicast routing as
|
1232 |
|
|
used on the MBONE (a high bandwidth network on top of the Internet
|
1233 |
|
|
which carries audio and video broadcasts) for example. In this case,
|
1234 |
|
|
say Y to "IP: multicasting" and "IP: multicast routing" as well. If
|
1235 |
|
|
unsure, say N.
|
1236 |
|
|
|
1237 |
|
|
IP: multicasting
|
1238 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MULTICAST
|
1239 |
|
|
This is code for addressing several networked computers at once,
|
1240 |
|
|
enlarging your kernel by about 2 kB. If you are using gated, the
|
1241 |
|
|
daemon that updates your computer's routing tables, you will need to
|
1242 |
|
|
have this option compiled in. You also need multicasting if you
|
1243 |
|
|
intend to participate in the MBONE, a high bandwidth network on top
|
1244 |
|
|
of the Internet which carries audio and video broadcasts. More
|
1245 |
|
|
information about the MBONE is on the WWW at
|
1246 |
|
|
http://www.best.com/~prince/techinfo/mbone.html (to browse the WWW,
|
1247 |
|
|
you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has one of
|
1248 |
|
|
the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). Information about the
|
1249 |
|
|
multicast capabilities of the various network cards is contained in
|
1250 |
|
|
drivers/net/README.multicast. For most people, it's safe to say N.
|
1251 |
|
|
|
1252 |
|
|
IP: optimize as router not host
|
1253 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_ROUTER
|
1254 |
|
|
Some Linux network drivers use a technique called copy and checksum
|
1255 |
|
|
to optimize host performance. For a machine which is forwarding most
|
1256 |
|
|
packets to another host this is however a loss. This parameter turns
|
1257 |
|
|
off copy and checksum from devices. It may make other changes in the
|
1258 |
|
|
future.
|
1259 |
|
|
|
1260 |
|
|
IP: firewalling
|
1261 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_FIREWALL
|
1262 |
|
|
If you want to configure your Linux box as a firewall for a local
|
1263 |
|
|
TCP/IP based network, say Y here. This will enlarge your kernel by
|
1264 |
|
|
about 2kB. You may need to read the FIREWALL-HOWTO, available via
|
1265 |
|
|
FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
1266 |
|
|
Also, you will need the ipfwadm tool (check the file
|
1267 |
|
|
Documentation/Changes for location and latest version) to allow
|
1268 |
|
|
selective blocking of internet traffic based on type, origin and
|
1269 |
|
|
destination. You need to enable IP firewalling in order to be able
|
1270 |
|
|
to use IP masquerading (i.e. local computers can chat with an
|
1271 |
|
|
outside host, but that outside host is made to think that it is
|
1272 |
|
|
talking to the firewall box. Makes the local network completely
|
1273 |
|
|
invisible and avoids the need to allocate valid IP host addresses
|
1274 |
|
|
for the machines on the local net) or to use the IP packet
|
1275 |
|
|
accounting to see what is using all your network bandwidth. This
|
1276 |
|
|
option is also needed when you want to enable the transparent
|
1277 |
|
|
proxying support (makes the computers on the local network think
|
1278 |
|
|
they're talking to a remote computer, while in reality the traffic
|
1279 |
|
|
is redirected by your Linux firewall to a local proxy server).
|
1280 |
|
|
|
1281 |
|
|
IP: accounting
|
1282 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_ACCT
|
1283 |
|
|
This keeps track of your IP network traffic and produces some
|
1284 |
|
|
statistics. Usually, you only want to say Y here if your box will be
|
1285 |
|
|
a router or a firewall for some local network, in which case you
|
1286 |
|
|
naturally should have said Y to IP forwarding/gatewaying resp. IP
|
1287 |
|
|
firewalling. The data is accessible with "cat /proc/net/ip_acct", so
|
1288 |
|
|
you want to say Y to the /proc filesystem below, if you say Y here.
|
1289 |
|
|
To specify what exactly should be recorded, you need the tool
|
1290 |
|
|
ipfwadm (check the file Documentation/Changes for location and
|
1291 |
|
|
latest version).
|
1292 |
|
|
|
1293 |
|
|
IP: tunneling
|
1294 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_IPIP
|
1295 |
|
|
Tunneling means encapsulating data of one protocol type within
|
1296 |
|
|
another protocol and sending it over a channel that understands the
|
1297 |
|
|
encapsulating protocol. This particular tunneling driver implements
|
1298 |
|
|
encapsulation of IP within IP, which sounds kind of pointless, but
|
1299 |
|
|
can be useful if you want to make your (or some other) machine
|
1300 |
|
|
appear on a different network than it physically is, or to use
|
1301 |
|
|
mobile-IP facilities (allowing laptops to seamlessly move between
|
1302 |
|
|
networks without changing their IP addresses; check out
|
1303 |
|
|
http://anchor.cs.binghamton.edu/~mobileip/LJ/index.html). Enabling
|
1304 |
|
|
this option will produce two modules ( = code which can be inserted
|
1305 |
|
|
in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), one
|
1306 |
|
|
encapsulator and one decapsulator. You can read details in
|
1307 |
|
|
drivers/net/README.tunnel. Most people can say N.
|
1308 |
|
|
|
1309 |
|
|
IP: firewall packet logging
|
1310 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_FIREWALL_VERBOSE
|
1311 |
|
|
This gives you information about what your firewall did with packets
|
1312 |
|
|
it received. The information is handled by the klogd demon which is
|
1313 |
|
|
responsible for kernel messages ("man klogd").
|
1314 |
|
|
|
1315 |
|
|
IP: transparent proxying (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1316 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_TRANSPARENT_PROXY
|
1317 |
|
|
This enables your Linux firewall to transparently redirect any
|
1318 |
|
|
network traffic originating from the local network and destined
|
1319 |
|
|
for a remote host to a local server, called a "transparent proxy
|
1320 |
|
|
server". This makes the local computers think they are talking to
|
1321 |
|
|
the remote end, while in fact they are connected to the local
|
1322 |
|
|
proxy. Redirection is activated by defining special input firewall
|
1323 |
|
|
rules (using the ipfwadm utility) and/or by doing an appropriate
|
1324 |
|
|
bind() system call.
|
1325 |
|
|
|
1326 |
|
|
IP: masquerading
|
1327 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE
|
1328 |
|
|
If one of the computers on your local network for which your Linux
|
1329 |
|
|
box acts as a firewall wants to send something to the outside, your
|
1330 |
|
|
box can "masquerade" as that host, i.e. it forwards the traffic to
|
1331 |
|
|
the intended destination, but makes it look like it came from the
|
1332 |
|
|
firewall box itself. It works both ways: if the outside host
|
1333 |
|
|
answers, the firewall will silently forward the traffic to the
|
1334 |
|
|
corresponding local computer. This way, the computers on your local
|
1335 |
|
|
net are completely invisible to the outside world, even though they
|
1336 |
|
|
can reach the outside and can be reached. This makes it possible to
|
1337 |
|
|
have the computers on the local network participate on the Internet
|
1338 |
|
|
even if they don't have officially registered IP addresses. (This
|
1339 |
|
|
last problem can also be solved by connecting the Linux box to the
|
1340 |
|
|
Internet using SLiRP [SLiRP is a SLIP/PPP emulator that works if you
|
1341 |
|
|
have a regular dial up shell account on some UNIX computer; get it
|
1342 |
|
|
from ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/Network/serial/].)
|
1343 |
|
|
Details on how to set things up are contained in the IP Masquerading
|
1344 |
|
|
FAQ, available at http://www.indyramp.com/masq/
|
1345 |
|
|
To use masquerading you must also enable Network Firewalls, IP
|
1346 |
|
|
forwarding/gatewaying, IP firewalling and (ideally, but optionally)
|
1347 |
|
|
IP always defragment.
|
1348 |
|
|
If you want this, say Y.
|
1349 |
|
|
|
1350 |
|
|
IP: MS PPTP masq support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1351 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_PPTP
|
1352 |
|
|
Support for masquerading of the GRE data channel portion of the PPTP
|
1353 |
|
|
Virtual Private Network protocol.
|
1354 |
|
|
If you are masquerading a PPTP client or server you need to enable
|
1355 |
|
|
this in addition to regular IP Masquerade.
|
1356 |
|
|
See http://www.wolfenet.com/~jhardin/ip_masq_pptp.html for more details.
|
1357 |
|
|
|
1358 |
|
|
IP: MS PPTP Call ID masq support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1359 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_PPTP_MULTICLIENT
|
1360 |
|
|
Enabling this adds code to masquerade PPTP Call IDs, which allows
|
1361 |
|
|
more than one masqueraded client to access the same server.
|
1362 |
|
|
This only needs to be enabled if you are masquerading more than one
|
1363 |
|
|
client, and if those clients will try to access the same PPTP server
|
1364 |
|
|
at the same time.
|
1365 |
|
|
You do NOT need to enable this if you are masquerading a PPTP
|
1366 |
|
|
server, regardless of how many clients will be accessing it.
|
1367 |
|
|
|
1368 |
|
|
IP: MS PPTP masq debugging
|
1369 |
|
|
DEBUG_IP_MASQUERADE_PPTP
|
1370 |
|
|
Enables PPTP Masquerade debugging messages. This should be disabled
|
1371 |
|
|
for normal use once you have PPTP masq working, as it will cause
|
1372 |
|
|
your system logs to quickly grow rather large. Enable verbose
|
1373 |
|
|
debugging for more detailed information.
|
1374 |
|
|
|
1375 |
|
|
IP: IPSEC ESP & ISAKMP masq support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1376 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_IPSEC
|
1377 |
|
|
Support for limited masquerading of the IPSEC ESP network encryption
|
1378 |
|
|
and ISAKMP key-exchange protocols.
|
1379 |
|
|
If you are masquerading an IPSEC client you need to enable this in
|
1380 |
|
|
addition to regular IP Masquerade.
|
1381 |
|
|
Note that this may not successfully masquerade all types of
|
1382 |
|
|
IPSEC-based encryption, as some options in the protocol offer a
|
1383 |
|
|
cryptographic checksum across the IP addresses, which prevents the
|
1384 |
|
|
masqueraded packets from being accepted.
|
1385 |
|
|
|
1386 |
|
|
IP: IPSEC masq table lifetime (minutes)
|
1387 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_IPSEC_EXPIRE
|
1388 |
|
|
After a period of inactivity IPSEC masq table entries expire and are
|
1389 |
|
|
removed. When this happens inbound traffic can no longer be routed
|
1390 |
|
|
to the masqueraded host until new outbound traffic creates a new
|
1391 |
|
|
masq table entry.
|
1392 |
|
|
For greatest reliability, your IPSEC rekey interval should be less
|
1393 |
|
|
than the table entry lifetime. If your rekey interval is greater
|
1394 |
|
|
than thirty minutes you will improve security by reducing it to
|
1395 |
|
|
thirty minutes. If you don't want to do that, then increase the masq
|
1396 |
|
|
table entry lifetime. Note that doing this will increase the clutter
|
1397 |
|
|
in the IPSEC masq table, as old table entries will persist for this
|
1398 |
|
|
many minutes after a rekey.
|
1399 |
|
|
The minimum lifetime is 15 minutes. Decreasing the lifetime will
|
1400 |
|
|
interfere with sessions that are idle for long periods of time.
|
1401 |
|
|
|
1402 |
|
|
IP: IPSEC masq debugging
|
1403 |
|
|
DEBUG_IP_MASQUERADE_IPSEC
|
1404 |
|
|
Enables IPSEC Masquerade debugging messages. This should be disabled
|
1405 |
|
|
for normal use once you have IPSEC masq working, as it will cause
|
1406 |
|
|
your system logs to quickly grow rather large. Enable verbose
|
1407 |
|
|
debugging for more detailed information.
|
1408 |
|
|
|
1409 |
|
|
IP: ipautofw masquerading (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1410 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_IPAUTOFW
|
1411 |
|
|
Richard Lynch's ipautofw allows masquerading to work with protocols
|
1412 |
|
|
which do not (as yet) have specific protocol helpers. Its source,
|
1413 |
|
|
and other information, is available at
|
1414 |
|
|
ftp://ftp.netis.com/pub/members/rlynch/.
|
1415 |
|
|
|
1416 |
|
|
IP: ICMP masquerading
|
1417 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE_ICMP
|
1418 |
|
|
The basic masquerade code described for CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE only
|
1419 |
|
|
handles TCP or UDP packets (and ICMP errors for existing
|
1420 |
|
|
connections). This option adds additional support for masquerading
|
1421 |
|
|
ICMP packets, such as ping or the probes used by the Windows 95
|
1422 |
|
|
tracert program.
|
1423 |
|
|
If you want this, say Y.
|
1424 |
|
|
|
1425 |
|
|
IP: always defragment
|
1426 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_ALWAYS_DEFRAG
|
1427 |
|
|
This option means that all incoming fragments ( = parts of IP
|
1428 |
|
|
packets that arose when some host between origin and destination
|
1429 |
|
|
decided that the IP packets were too large and cut them in pieces)
|
1430 |
|
|
will be reassembled (defragmented) before being processed, even if
|
1431 |
|
|
they are about to be forwarded. This option is highly recommended
|
1432 |
|
|
if you have enabled the masquerading support (CONFIG_IP_MASQUERADE),
|
1433 |
|
|
because this facility requires that second and further fragments can
|
1434 |
|
|
be related to TCP or UDP port numbers, which are only stored in the
|
1435 |
|
|
first fragment. When using IP firewall support (CONFIG_IP_FIREWALL),
|
1436 |
|
|
you might also want to enable this option, to have a more reliable
|
1437 |
|
|
firewall (otherwise second and further fragments will always be
|
1438 |
|
|
accepted by the firewall). When using transparent proxying
|
1439 |
|
|
(CONFIG_IP_TRANSPARENT_PROXY), this option is implicit, although it
|
1440 |
|
|
is safe to say N here. Do not say Y to this option except when
|
1441 |
|
|
running either a firewall that is the sole link to your network or
|
1442 |
|
|
a transparent proxy.
|
1443 |
|
|
Never ever say Y to this for a normal router or host.
|
1444 |
|
|
|
1445 |
|
|
IP: aliasing support
|
1446 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_ALIAS
|
1447 |
|
|
Sometimes it is useful to give several addresses to a single network
|
1448 |
|
|
interface ( = serial port or Ethernet card). The most common case
|
1449 |
|
|
is that you want to serve different WWW documents to the outside
|
1450 |
|
|
according to which of your host names they used to connect to you.
|
1451 |
|
|
This is explained in detail on the WWW at
|
1452 |
|
|
http://www.thesphere.com/~dlp/TwoServers/ (to browse the WWW, you
|
1453 |
|
|
need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has one of the
|
1454 |
|
|
programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). Another scenario would be that
|
1455 |
|
|
there are two logical networks living on your local Ethernet and you
|
1456 |
|
|
want to access them both with the same Ethernet card. The
|
1457 |
|
|
configuration of these alias addresses is done with a special name
|
1458 |
|
|
syntax explained in Documentation/networking/alias.txt. If you want
|
1459 |
|
|
this, say Y. Most people don't need it and say N.
|
1460 |
|
|
|
1461 |
|
|
IP: multicast routing (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1462 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_MROUTE
|
1463 |
|
|
This is used if you want your machine to act as a router for IP
|
1464 |
|
|
packets that have several destination addresses. It is needed on the
|
1465 |
|
|
MBONE, a high bandwidth network on top of the Internet which carries
|
1466 |
|
|
audio and video broadcasts. In order to do that, you would most
|
1467 |
|
|
likely run the program mrouted. Information about the multicast
|
1468 |
|
|
capabilities of the various network cards is contained in
|
1469 |
|
|
drivers/net/README.multicast. If you haven't heard about it, you
|
1470 |
|
|
don't need it.
|
1471 |
|
|
|
1472 |
|
|
PC/TCP compatibility mode
|
1473 |
|
|
CONFIG_INET_PCTCP
|
1474 |
|
|
If you have been having difficulties telnetting to your Linux
|
1475 |
|
|
machine from a DOS system that uses (broken) PC/TCP networking
|
1476 |
|
|
software (all versions up to OnNet 2.0) over your local Ethernet try
|
1477 |
|
|
enabling this option. Everyone else says N.
|
1478 |
|
|
People having problems with NCSA telnet should see the file
|
1479 |
|
|
linux/Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet.
|
1480 |
|
|
|
1481 |
|
|
Reverse ARP
|
1482 |
|
|
CONFIG_INET_RARP
|
1483 |
|
|
Since you asked: if there are (usually diskless or portable)
|
1484 |
|
|
machines on your local network that know their hardware Ethernet
|
1485 |
|
|
addresses but don't know their IP addresses upon startup, they can
|
1486 |
|
|
send out a Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP) request to
|
1487 |
|
|
find out their own IP addresses. Diskless Sun 3 machines use this
|
1488 |
|
|
procedure at boot time. If you want your Linux box to be able to
|
1489 |
|
|
*answer* such requests, say Y here; you'd have to run the program
|
1490 |
|
|
rarp ("man rarp") on your box. If you actually want to use a
|
1491 |
|
|
diskless Sun 3 machine as an Xterminal to Linux, say Y here and
|
1492 |
|
|
fetch Linux-Xkernel from
|
1493 |
|
|
ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/Network/boot.net/. Superior
|
1494 |
|
|
solutions to the problem of booting and configuring machines over a
|
1495 |
|
|
net connection are given by the protocol BOOTP and its successor
|
1496 |
|
|
DHCP. See the DHCP FAQ
|
1497 |
|
|
http://web.syr.edu/~jmwobus/comfaqs/dhcp.faq.html for details. If
|
1498 |
|
|
you want to compile RARP support as a module ( = code which can be
|
1499 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
1500 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. If you don't
|
1501 |
|
|
understand a word of the above, say N and rest in peace.
|
1502 |
|
|
|
1503 |
|
|
Assume subnets are local
|
1504 |
|
|
CONFIG_INET_SNARL
|
1505 |
|
|
Say Y if you are on a subnetted network with all machines connected
|
1506 |
|
|
by Ethernet segments only, as this option optimizes network access
|
1507 |
|
|
for this special case. If there are other connections, e.g. SLIP
|
1508 |
|
|
links, between machines of your IP network, say N. If in doubt,
|
1509 |
|
|
say N. The PATH mtu discovery facility will cover most cases anyway.
|
1510 |
|
|
|
1511 |
|
|
Disable Path MTU Discovery (normally enabled)
|
1512 |
|
|
CONFIG_NO_PATH_MTU_DISCOVERY
|
1513 |
|
|
MTU (maximal transfer unit) is the size of the chunks we send out
|
1514 |
|
|
over the net. "Path MTU Discovery" means that, instead of always
|
1515 |
|
|
sending very small chunks, we start out sending big ones and if we
|
1516 |
|
|
then discover that some host along the way likes its chunks smaller,
|
1517 |
|
|
we adjust to a smaller size. This is good, so most people say N.
|
1518 |
|
|
However, some versions of DOS NCSA telnet (and other software) are
|
1519 |
|
|
broken and can only connect to your Linux machine if you say Y here.
|
1520 |
|
|
See also Documentation/networking/ncsa-telnet for the location of
|
1521 |
|
|
fixed NCSA telnet clients.
|
1522 |
|
|
|
1523 |
|
|
Disable NAGLE algorithm (normally enabled)
|
1524 |
|
|
CONFIG_TCP_NAGLE_OFF
|
1525 |
|
|
The NAGLE algorithm works by requiring an acknowledgment before
|
1526 |
|
|
sending small IP frames ( = packets). This keeps tiny telnet and
|
1527 |
|
|
rlogin packets from congesting Wide Area Networks. Most people
|
1528 |
|
|
strongly recommend to say N here, thereby leaving NAGLE enabled.
|
1529 |
|
|
Those programs that would benefit from disabling this facility can
|
1530 |
|
|
do it on a per connection basis themselves.
|
1531 |
|
|
|
1532 |
|
|
IP: Drop source routed frames
|
1533 |
|
|
CONFIG_IP_NOSR
|
1534 |
|
|
Usually, the originator of an IP frame ( = packet) specifies only
|
1535 |
|
|
the destination, and the hosts along the way do the routing, i.e.
|
1536 |
|
|
they decide how to forward the frame. However, there is a feature
|
1537 |
|
|
of the IP protocol that allows to specify the full route for a given
|
1538 |
|
|
frame already at its origin. A frame with such a fully specified
|
1539 |
|
|
route is called "source routed". The question now is whether we
|
1540 |
|
|
should honour these route requests when such frames arrive, or if
|
1541 |
|
|
we should drop all those frames instead. Honouring them can
|
1542 |
|
|
introduce security problems (and is rarely a useful feature), and
|
1543 |
|
|
hence it is recommended that you say Y here unless you really know
|
1544 |
|
|
what you're doing.
|
1545 |
|
|
|
1546 |
|
|
IP: Allow large windows (not recommend if <16MB of memory)
|
1547 |
|
|
CONFIG_SKB_LARGE
|
1548 |
|
|
On high speed, long distance networks the performance limit on
|
1549 |
|
|
networking becomes the amount of data a machine can buffer until the
|
1550 |
|
|
other end confirms its reception. (At 45Mbit/second there are a lot
|
1551 |
|
|
of bits between New York and London...) This option allows larger
|
1552 |
|
|
amounts of data to be "in flight" at a given time. It also means a
|
1553 |
|
|
user process can require a lot more memory for network buffers and
|
1554 |
|
|
thus this option is best only used on machines with 16MB of
|
1555 |
|
|
memory or higher.
|
1556 |
|
|
Unless you are using long links with end to end speeds of over 2Mbit
|
1557 |
|
|
a second or satellite links this option will make no difference to
|
1558 |
|
|
performance.
|
1559 |
|
|
|
1560 |
|
|
The IPX protocol
|
1561 |
|
|
CONFIG_IPX
|
1562 |
|
|
This is support for the Novell networking protocol, IPX, commonly
|
1563 |
|
|
used for local networks of Windows machines. You need it if you want
|
1564 |
|
|
to access Novell NetWare file or print servers using the Linux
|
1565 |
|
|
Novell client ncpfs (available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
1566 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Filesystems/) or from within the
|
1567 |
|
|
Linux DOS emulator dosemu (read the DOSEMU-HOWTO, available in
|
1568 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO). In order to do the former,
|
1569 |
|
|
you'll also have to say Y to "NCP filesystem support", below. To
|
1570 |
|
|
turn your Linux box into a fully featured NetWare file server and
|
1571 |
|
|
IPX router, say Y here and fetch either lwared from
|
1572 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Network/daemons/ or mars_nwe from
|
1573 |
|
|
ftp.gwdg.de:/pub/linux/misc/ncpfs. For more information, read the
|
1574 |
|
|
IPX-HOWTO in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/howto. The IPX driver
|
1575 |
|
|
would enlarge your kernel by about 5 kB. This driver is also
|
1576 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
1577 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
1578 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1579 |
|
|
Unless you want to integrate your Linux box with a local Novell
|
1580 |
|
|
network, say N.
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
Full internal IPX network
|
1583 |
|
|
CONFIG_IPX_INTERN
|
1584 |
|
|
The full internal IPX network enables you to allocate sockets on
|
1585 |
|
|
different virtual nodes of the internal network. This is done by
|
1586 |
|
|
evaluating the field sipx_node of the socket address given to the
|
1587 |
|
|
bind call. So applications should always initialize the node field
|
1588 |
|
|
to 0 when binding a socket on the primary network. In this case the
|
1589 |
|
|
socket is assigned the default node that has been given to the
|
1590 |
|
|
kernel when the internal network was created. By enabling the full
|
1591 |
|
|
internal IPX network the cross-forwarding of packets targeted at
|
1592 |
|
|
'special' sockets to sockets listening on the primary network is
|
1593 |
|
|
disabled. This might break existing applications, especially
|
1594 |
|
|
RIP/SAP daemons. A RIP/SAP daemon that works well with the full
|
1595 |
|
|
internal net can be found on ftp.gwdg.de:/pub/linux/misc/ncpfs.
|
1596 |
|
|
If you don't know what you are doing, say N.
|
1597 |
|
|
|
1598 |
|
|
AppleTalk DDP
|
1599 |
|
|
CONFIG_ATALK
|
1600 |
|
|
AppleTalk is the way Apple computers speak to each other on a
|
1601 |
|
|
network. EtherTalk is the name used for AppleTalk over Ethernet
|
1602 |
|
|
and LocalTalk is AppleTalk over the Apple serial links. If your
|
1603 |
|
|
Linux box is connected to such a network and you want to join the
|
1604 |
|
|
conversation, say Y. You will need to use the netatalk package
|
1605 |
|
|
so that your Linux box can act as a print and file server for
|
1606 |
|
|
macs as well as access AppleTalk printers. Check out
|
1607 |
|
|
http://artoo.hitchcock.org/~flowerpt/projects/linux-netatalk/ on
|
1608 |
|
|
the WWW for details (to browse the WWW, you need to have access to
|
1609 |
|
|
a machine on the Internet that has one of the programs lynx,
|
1610 |
|
|
netscape or Mosaic). The NET-2-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
1611 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO contains
|
1612 |
|
|
valuable information as well. This driver is also available as a
|
1613 |
|
|
module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1614 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
1615 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. I hear that
|
1616 |
|
|
the GNU boycott of Apple is over, so even politically correct people
|
1617 |
|
|
are allowed to say Y here. At the time the kernel is released the
|
1618 |
|
|
localtalk drivers are not yet ready to ship. The kernel however
|
1619 |
|
|
supports localtalk and when such drivers become available all you
|
1620 |
|
|
will need to do is download and install the localtalk driver.
|
1621 |
|
|
|
1622 |
|
|
Amateur Radio AX.25 Level 2
|
1623 |
|
|
CONFIG_AX25
|
1624 |
|
|
This is the protocol used for computer communication over amateur
|
1625 |
|
|
radio. It is either used by itself for point-to-point links, or to
|
1626 |
|
|
carry other protocols such as TCP/IP. To use it, you need a device
|
1627 |
|
|
that connects your Linux box to your amateur radio. You can either
|
1628 |
|
|
use a low speed TNC (a Terminal Node Controller acts as a kind of
|
1629 |
|
|
modem connecting your computer's serial port to your radio's
|
1630 |
|
|
microphone input and speaker output) supporting the KISS protocol or
|
1631 |
|
|
the various SCC cards that are supported by the Ottawa PI, the
|
1632 |
|
|
Gracilis Packetwin and the generic Z8530 driver. Another option are
|
1633 |
|
|
the Baycom modem serial and parallel port hacks (supported by their
|
1634 |
|
|
own driver) and the other baycom cards (SCC) (supported by the Z8530
|
1635 |
|
|
driver). Information about where to get supporting software for
|
1636 |
|
|
Linux amateur radio as well as information about how to configure an
|
1637 |
|
|
AX.25 port is contained in the HAM-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
1638 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. You might also
|
1639 |
|
|
want to check out the file Documentation/networking/ax25.txt in the
|
1640 |
|
|
kernel source. More information about digital amateur radio in
|
1641 |
|
|
general is on the WWW at http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/
|
1642 |
|
|
/hypertext/faq/usenet/radio/ham-radio/digital-faq/faq.html
|
1643 |
|
|
(To browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the
|
1644 |
|
|
Internet that has one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic).
|
1645 |
|
|
|
1646 |
|
|
Amateur Radio NET/ROM
|
1647 |
|
|
CONFIG_NETROM
|
1648 |
|
|
NET/ROM is a network layer protocol on top of AX.25 useful for
|
1649 |
|
|
routing. A comprehensive listing of all the software for Linux
|
1650 |
|
|
amateur radio users as well as information about how to configure an
|
1651 |
|
|
AX.25 port is contained in the HAM-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
1652 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. You also might
|
1653 |
|
|
also want to check out the file Documentation/networking/ax25.txt.
|
1654 |
|
|
More information about digital amateur radio in general is on the
|
1655 |
|
|
WWW at http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu
|
1656 |
|
|
/hypertext/faq/usenet/radio/ham-radio/digital-faq/faq.html
|
1657 |
|
|
(To browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the
|
1658 |
|
|
Internet that has one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic).
|
1659 |
|
|
|
1660 |
|
|
AX.25 over Ethernet
|
1661 |
|
|
CONFIG_BPQETHER
|
1662 |
|
|
AX.25 is the protocol used for computer communication over amateur
|
1663 |
|
|
radio. If you say Y here, you will be able to send and receive AX.25
|
1664 |
|
|
traffic over Ethernet (also called "BPQ AX.25"), which could be
|
1665 |
|
|
useful if some other computer on your local network has a direct
|
1666 |
|
|
amateur radio connection.
|
1667 |
|
|
|
1668 |
|
|
Bridging (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1669 |
|
|
CONFIG_BRIDGE
|
1670 |
|
|
If you say Y here, then your Linux box will be able to act as an
|
1671 |
|
|
Ethernet bridge, which means that the different Ethernet segments it
|
1672 |
|
|
is connected to will appear as one Ethernet to the participants.
|
1673 |
|
|
Several such bridges can work together to create even larger
|
1674 |
|
|
networks of Ethernets using the IEEE802.1 spanning tree algorithm.
|
1675 |
|
|
As this is a standard, Linux bridges will interwork properly with
|
1676 |
|
|
other third party bridge products. In order to use this, you'll need
|
1677 |
|
|
the bridge configuration tools available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
1678 |
|
|
from shadow.cabi.net. Note that if your box acts as a bridge, it
|
1679 |
|
|
probably contains several Ethernet devices, but the kernel is not
|
1680 |
|
|
able to recognize more than one at boot time without help; for
|
1681 |
|
|
details read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
1682 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
1683 |
|
|
The Bridging code is still in test. If unsure, say N.
|
1684 |
|
|
|
1685 |
|
|
Kernel/User network link driver (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
1686 |
|
|
CONFIG_NETLINK
|
1687 |
|
|
This driver allows for two-way communication between certain parts
|
1688 |
|
|
of the kernel or modules and user processes; the user processes are
|
1689 |
|
|
able to read from and write to character special files in the /dev
|
1690 |
|
|
directory having major mode 36. So far, the kernel uses it to
|
1691 |
|
|
publish some network related information if you enable "Routing
|
1692 |
|
|
messages", below. Say Y if you want to experiment with it; this is
|
1693 |
|
|
EXPERIMENTAL code, which means that it need not be completely
|
1694 |
|
|
stable. You need to include this if you want to use arpd, a daemon
|
1695 |
|
|
that helps keep the internal ARP cache (a mapping between IP
|
1696 |
|
|
addresses and hardware addresses on the local network) small.
|
1697 |
|
|
If unsure, say N.
|
1698 |
|
|
|
1699 |
|
|
Routing messages
|
1700 |
|
|
CONFIG_RTNETLINK
|
1701 |
|
|
If you enable this and create a character special file /dev/route
|
1702 |
|
|
with major number 36 and minor number 0 using mknod ("man mknod"),
|
1703 |
|
|
you can read some network related routing information from that
|
1704 |
|
|
file. Everything you write to that file will be discarded.
|
1705 |
|
|
|
1706 |
|
|
SCSI support?
|
1707 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI
|
1708 |
|
|
If you want to use a SCSI hard disk, SCSI tapedrive, SCSI CDROM or
|
1709 |
|
|
any other SCSI device under Linux, say Y and make sure that you know
|
1710 |
|
|
the name of your SCSI host adapter (the card inside your computer
|
1711 |
|
|
that "speaks" the SCSI protocol), because you will be asked for it.
|
1712 |
|
|
You also need to say Y here if you want support for the parallel
|
1713 |
|
|
port version of the 100MB IOMEGA ZIP drive. Please read the
|
1714 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:
|
1715 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available as a module
|
1716 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
1717 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module,
|
1718 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt and
|
1719 |
|
|
Documentation/scsi.txt.
|
1720 |
|
|
|
1721 |
|
|
SCSI disk support
|
1722 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_SD
|
1723 |
|
|
If you want to use a SCSI hard disk or the SCSI or parallel port
|
1724 |
|
|
version of the IOMEGA ZIP drive under Linux, say Y and read the
|
1725 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:
|
1726 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This is NOT for SCSI CDROMs.
|
1727 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
1728 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want).
|
1729 |
|
|
If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
1730 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt and Documentation/scsi.txt.
|
1731 |
|
|
|
1732 |
|
|
SCSI tape support
|
1733 |
|
|
CONFIG_CHR_DEV_ST
|
1734 |
|
|
If you want to use a SCSI tapedrive under Linux, say Y and read the
|
1735 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:
|
1736 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO and drivers/scsi/README.st in the kernel
|
1737 |
|
|
source. This is NOT for SCSI CDROMs. This driver is also available
|
1738 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1739 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
1740 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt and
|
1741 |
|
|
Documentation/scsi.txt.
|
1742 |
|
|
|
1743 |
|
|
SCSI CDROM support
|
1744 |
|
|
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_SR
|
1745 |
|
|
If you want to use a SCSI CDROM under Linux, say Y and read the
|
1746 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO and the CDROM-HOWTO from sunsite.unc.edu:
|
1747 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Also make sure to enable the ISO9660
|
1748 |
|
|
filesystem later. This driver is also available as a module ( = code
|
1749 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
1750 |
|
|
whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M
|
1751 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt and Documentation/scsi.txt.
|
1752 |
|
|
|
1753 |
|
|
SCSI generic support
|
1754 |
|
|
CONFIG_CHR_DEV_SG
|
1755 |
|
|
If you want to use SCSI scanners, synthesizers or CD-writers or just
|
1756 |
|
|
about anything having "SCSI" in its name other than hard disks,
|
1757 |
|
|
CDROMs or tapes, say Y here. Those won't be supported by the kernel
|
1758 |
|
|
directly, so you need some additional software which knows how to
|
1759 |
|
|
talk to these devices using the SCSI protocol. For CD-writers, you
|
1760 |
|
|
would need the program cdwrite, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
1761 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/utils/disk-management; for other
|
1762 |
|
|
devices, it's possible that you'll have to write the driver software
|
1763 |
|
|
yourself, so have a look at the SCSI-HOWTO and at the
|
1764 |
|
|
SCSI-Programming-HOWTO, both available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
1765 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
1766 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1767 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
1768 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt and Documentation/scsi.txt.
|
1769 |
|
|
|
1770 |
|
|
Probe all LUNs on each SCSI device
|
1771 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_MULTI_LUN
|
1772 |
|
|
If you have a SCSI device that supports more than one LUN (Logical
|
1773 |
|
|
Unit Number), e.g. a CD jukebox, and only one LUN is detected, you
|
1774 |
|
|
can say Y here to force the SCSI driver to probe for multiple LUNs.
|
1775 |
|
|
A SCSI device with multiple LUNs acts logically like multiple SCSI
|
1776 |
|
|
devices. The vast majority of SCSI devices have only one LUN, and
|
1777 |
|
|
so most people can say N here and should in fact do so, because it
|
1778 |
|
|
is safer.
|
1779 |
|
|
|
1780 |
|
|
Verbose SCSI error reporting (kernel size +=12K)
|
1781 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS
|
1782 |
|
|
The error messages regarding your SCSI hardware will be easier to
|
1783 |
|
|
understand if you enable this; it will enlarge your kernel by about
|
1784 |
|
|
12KB. If in doubt, say Y.
|
1785 |
|
|
|
1786 |
|
|
AdvanSys SCSI support
|
1787 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_ADVANSYS
|
1788 |
|
|
This is a driver for all SCSI host adapters manufactured by
|
1789 |
|
|
AdvanSys. It is documented in the kernel source in
|
1790 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/advansys.c. This driver is also available as a module
|
1791 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
1792 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module,
|
1793 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1794 |
|
|
|
1795 |
|
|
Adaptec AHA152X/2825 support
|
1796 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_AHA152X
|
1797 |
|
|
This is support for the AHA-1510, AHA-1520, AHA-1522, and AHA-2825
|
1798 |
|
|
SCSI host adapters. It is explained in section 3.3 of the
|
1799 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:
|
1800 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. You might also want to read the comments at
|
1801 |
|
|
the top of drivers/scsi/aha152x.c. This driver is also available as
|
1802 |
|
|
a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1803 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
1804 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1805 |
|
|
|
1806 |
|
|
Adaptec AHA1542 support
|
1807 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_AHA1542
|
1808 |
|
|
This is support for a SCSI host adapter. It is explained in section
|
1809 |
|
|
3.4 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1810 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that Trantor was
|
1811 |
|
|
recently purchased by Adaptec, and some former Trantor products are
|
1812 |
|
|
being sold under the Adaptec name. If it doesn't work out of the
|
1813 |
|
|
box, you may have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/aha1542.h.
|
1814 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
1815 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
1816 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1817 |
|
|
|
1818 |
|
|
Adaptec AHA1740 support
|
1819 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_AHA1740
|
1820 |
|
|
This is support for a SCSI host adapter. It is explained in
|
1821 |
|
|
section 3.5 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
1822 |
|
|
at sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out
|
1823 |
|
|
of the box, you may have to change some settings in
|
1824 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/aha1740.h. This driver is also available as a module
|
1825 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
1826 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module,
|
1827 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1828 |
|
|
|
1829 |
|
|
Adaptec AIC7xxx chipset SCSI controller support
|
1830 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_AIC7XXX
|
1831 |
|
|
This is support for the various aic7xxx based Adaptec SCSI
|
1832 |
|
|
controllers. These include the 274x EISA cards; 284x VLB cards; 2902,
|
1833 |
|
|
2910, 293x, 294x, 394x, 3985 and several other PCI and motherboard based
|
1834 |
|
|
SCSI controllers from Adaptec. It does not support the AAA-13x RAID
|
1835 |
|
|
controllers from Adaptec, nor will it likely ever support them. It
|
1836 |
|
|
does not support the 2920 cards from Adaptec that use the Future Domain
|
1837 |
|
|
SCSI controller chip. For those cards, you need the "Future Domain
|
1838 |
|
|
16xx SCSI support" driver.
|
1839 |
|
|
|
1840 |
|
|
In general, if the controller is based on an Adaptec SCSI controller
|
1841 |
|
|
chip from the aic777x series or the aic78xx series, it should work. The
|
1842 |
|
|
only exception is the 7810 which is specifically not supported (that's the
|
1843 |
|
|
RAID controller chip on the AAA-13x cards).
|
1844 |
|
|
|
1845 |
|
|
Information on the configuration options for this controller can be
|
1846 |
|
|
found by checking the help file for each of the available
|
1847 |
|
|
configuration options. You should read drivers/scsi/README.aic7xxx
|
1848 |
|
|
at a minimum before contacting the maintainer with any questions.
|
1849 |
|
|
The SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1850 |
|
|
ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO can also be of great help.
|
1851 |
|
|
|
1852 |
|
|
If you want to compile this driver as a module ( = code which can be
|
1853 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
1854 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. The module will be
|
1855 |
|
|
called aic7xxx.o.
|
1856 |
|
|
|
1857 |
|
|
Enable or Disable Tagged Command Queueing by default
|
1858 |
|
|
CONFIG_AIC7XXX_TCQ_ON_BY_DEFAULT
|
1859 |
|
|
This option causes the aic7xxx driver to attempt to use tagged command
|
1860 |
|
|
queueing on any devices that claim to support it. If this is set to yes,
|
1861 |
|
|
you can still turn off TCQ on troublesome devices with the use of the
|
1862 |
|
|
tag_info boot parameter. See /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/README.aic7xxx
|
1863 |
|
|
for more information on that and other aic7xxx setup commands. If this
|
1864 |
|
|
option is turned off, you may still enable TCQ on known good devices by
|
1865 |
|
|
use of the tag_info boot parameter.
|
1866 |
|
|
|
1867 |
|
|
If you are unsure about your devices then it is safest to say N here.
|
1868 |
|
|
|
1869 |
|
|
However, TCQ can increase performance on some hard drives by as much
|
1870 |
|
|
as 50% or more, so I would recommend that if you say N here, that you
|
1871 |
|
|
at least read the README.aic7xxx file so you will know how to enable
|
1872 |
|
|
this option manually should your drives prove to be safe in regards
|
1873 |
|
|
to TCQ.
|
1874 |
|
|
|
1875 |
|
|
Conversely, certain drives are known to lock up or cause bus resets when
|
1876 |
|
|
TCQ is enabled on them. If you have a Western Digital Enterprise SCSI
|
1877 |
|
|
drive for instance, then don't even bother to enable TCQ on it as the
|
1878 |
|
|
drive will become unreliable, and it will actually reduce performance.
|
1879 |
|
|
|
1880 |
|
|
Default number of TCQ commands per device
|
1881 |
|
|
CONFIG_AIC7XXX_CMDS_PER_DEVICE
|
1882 |
|
|
Specify the number of commands you would like to allocate per SCSI
|
1883 |
|
|
device when Tagged Command Queueing (TCQ) is enabled on that device.
|
1884 |
|
|
|
1885 |
|
|
Reasonable figures are in the range of 8 to 24 commands per device,
|
1886 |
|
|
but depending on hardware could be increased or decreased from that
|
1887 |
|
|
figure. If the number is too high for any particular device, the
|
1888 |
|
|
driver will automatically compensate usually after only 10 minutes
|
1889 |
|
|
of uptime. It will not hinder performance if some of your devices
|
1890 |
|
|
eventually have their command depth reduced, but is a waste of memory
|
1891 |
|
|
if all of your devices end up reducing this number down to a more
|
1892 |
|
|
reasonable figure.
|
1893 |
|
|
|
1894 |
|
|
NOTE: Certain very broken drives are known to lock up when given more
|
1895 |
|
|
commands than they like to deal with. Quantum Fireball drives are the
|
1896 |
|
|
most common in this category. For the Quantum Fireball drives I would
|
1897 |
|
|
suggest no more than 8 commands per device.
|
1898 |
|
|
|
1899 |
|
|
Default: 8
|
1900 |
|
|
|
1901 |
|
|
Collect statistics to report in /proc
|
1902 |
|
|
CONFIG_AIC7XXX_PROC_STATS
|
1903 |
|
|
This option tells the driver to keep track of how many commands have
|
1904 |
|
|
been sent to each particular device and report that information to
|
1905 |
|
|
the user via the /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/n file, where n is the number of
|
1906 |
|
|
the aic7xxx controller you want the information on. This adds a
|
1907 |
|
|
small amount of overhead to each and every SCSI command the aic7xxx
|
1908 |
|
|
driver handles, so if you aren't really interested in this
|
1909 |
|
|
information, it is best to leave it disabled. This will only work if
|
1910 |
|
|
you also say Y to "/proc filesystem support", below.
|
1911 |
|
|
|
1912 |
|
|
If unsure, say N.
|
1913 |
|
|
|
1914 |
|
|
Delay in seconds after SCSI bus reset
|
1915 |
|
|
CONFIG_AIC7XXX_RESET_DELAY
|
1916 |
|
|
This sets how long the driver will wait after resetting the SCSI bus
|
1917 |
|
|
before attempting to communicate with the devices on the SCSI bus
|
1918 |
|
|
again. This delay will be used during the reset phase at bootup time
|
1919 |
|
|
as well as after any reset that might occur during normal operation.
|
1920 |
|
|
Reasonable numbers range anywhere from 5 to 15 seconds depending on
|
1921 |
|
|
your devices. DAT tape drives are notorious for needing more time
|
1922 |
|
|
after a bus reset to be ready for the next command, but most hard
|
1923 |
|
|
drives and CD-ROM devices are ready in only a few seconds. This
|
1924 |
|
|
option has a maximum upper limit of 20 seconds to avoid bad
|
1925 |
|
|
interactions between the aic7xxx driver and the rest of the linux
|
1926 |
|
|
kernel. The default value has been reduced to 5 seconds. If this
|
1927 |
|
|
doesn't work with your hardware, try increasing this value.
|
1928 |
|
|
|
1929 |
|
|
BusLogic SCSI support
|
1930 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_BUSLOGIC
|
1931 |
|
|
This is support for BusLogic MultiMaster and FlashPoint SCSI Host
|
1932 |
|
|
Adapters. Consult the SCSI-HOWTO, available via anonymous FTP from
|
1933 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, and the files README.BusLogic
|
1934 |
|
|
and README.FlashPoint in drivers/scsi for more information. If this
|
1935 |
|
|
driver does not work correctly without modification, please contact
|
1936 |
|
|
the author, Leonard N. Zubkoff, by email to lnz@dandelion.com.
|
1937 |
|
|
You can also build this driver as a module ( = code which can be
|
1938 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
1939 |
|
|
but only a single instance may be loaded. If you want to compile it
|
1940 |
|
|
as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1941 |
|
|
|
1942 |
|
|
Omit BusLogic SCSI FlashPoint support
|
1943 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_OMIT_FLASHPOINT
|
1944 |
|
|
This option allows you to omit the FlashPoint support from the
|
1945 |
|
|
BusLogic SCSI driver. The FlashPoint SCCB Manager code is
|
1946 |
|
|
substantial, so users of MultiMaster Host Adapters may wish to
|
1947 |
|
|
omit it.
|
1948 |
|
|
|
1949 |
|
|
DTC3180/3280 SCSI support
|
1950 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_DTC3280
|
1951 |
|
|
This is support for DTC 3180/3280 SCSI Host Adapters. Please read
|
1952 |
|
|
the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1953 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO and the file
|
1954 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/README.dtc3x80. This driver is also available as a
|
1955 |
|
|
module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1956 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
1957 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1958 |
|
|
|
1959 |
|
|
EATA-DMA (DPT, NEC, AT&T, SNI, AST, Olivetti, Alphatronix) support
|
1960 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_EATA_DMA
|
1961 |
|
|
This is support for the EATA-DMA protocol compliant SCSI Host
|
1962 |
|
|
Adapters like the SmartCache III/IV, SmartRAID controller families
|
1963 |
|
|
and the DPT PM2011B and PM2012B controllers. Please read the
|
1964 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1965 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also
|
1966 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
1967 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
1968 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1969 |
|
|
|
1970 |
|
|
EATA-PIO (old DPT PM2001, PM2012A) support
|
1971 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_EATA_PIO
|
1972 |
|
|
This driver supports all EATA-PIO protocol compliant SCSI Host
|
1973 |
|
|
Adapters like the DPT PM2001 and the PM2012A. EATA-DMA compliant
|
1974 |
|
|
host adapters could also use this driver but are discouraged from
|
1975 |
|
|
doing so, since this driver only supports hard disks and lacks
|
1976 |
|
|
numerous features. You might want to have a look at the SCSI-HOWTO,
|
1977 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1978 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
1979 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
1980 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
1981 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1982 |
|
|
|
1983 |
|
|
UltraStor 14F/34F support
|
1984 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_U14_34F
|
1985 |
|
|
This is support for the UltraStor 14F and 34F SCSI-2 host adapters.
|
1986 |
|
|
The source at drivers/scsi/u14-34f.c contains some information about
|
1987 |
|
|
this hardware. If the driver doesn't work out of the box, you may
|
1988 |
|
|
have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/u14-34f.c.
|
1989 |
|
|
Read the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
1990 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that there is also
|
1991 |
|
|
another driver for the same hardware: "UltraStor SCSI support",
|
1992 |
|
|
below. You should enable both only if you want 24F support as well.
|
1993 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
1994 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want).
|
1995 |
|
|
If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
1996 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
1997 |
|
|
|
1998 |
|
|
Future Domain 16xx SCSI support
|
1999 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_FUTURE_DOMAIN
|
2000 |
|
|
This is support for Future Domain's 16-bit SCSI host adapters
|
2001 |
|
|
(TMC-1660/1680, TMC-1650/1670, TMC-3260, TMC-1610M/MER/MEX)
|
2002 |
|
|
and other adapters based on the Future Domain chipsets (Quantum
|
2003 |
|
|
ISA-200S, ISA-250MG; Adaptec AHA-2920; and at least one IBM board).
|
2004 |
|
|
It is explained in section 3.7 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
2005 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
2006 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
2007 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want).
|
2008 |
|
|
If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
2009 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2010 |
|
|
|
2011 |
|
|
Generic NCR5380/53c400 SCSI support
|
2012 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_GENERIC_NCR5380
|
2013 |
|
|
This is the generic NCR family of SCSI controllers, not to be
|
2014 |
|
|
confused with the NCR 53c7 or 8xx controllers. It is explained in
|
2015 |
|
|
section 3.8 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
2016 |
|
|
at sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of
|
2017 |
|
|
the box, you may have to change some settings in
|
2018 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/g_NCR5380.h. This driver is also available as a module
|
2019 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
2020 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module,
|
2021 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2022 |
|
|
|
2023 |
|
|
Enable NCR53c400 extensions
|
2024 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_GENERIC_NCR53C400
|
2025 |
|
|
This enables certain optimizations for the NCR53c400 SCSI cards. You
|
2026 |
|
|
might as well try it out. Note that this driver will only probe for
|
2027 |
|
|
the Trantor T130B in its default configuration; you might have to
|
2028 |
|
|
pass a command line option to the kernel at boot time if it doesn't
|
2029 |
|
|
detect your card. See the file drivers/scsi/README.g_NCR5380 for
|
2030 |
|
|
details. If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
2031 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2032 |
|
|
|
2033 |
|
|
NCR5380/53c400 mapping method (use Port for T130B)
|
2034 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_G_NCR5380_PORT
|
2035 |
|
|
The NCR5380 and NCR53c400 SCSI controllers come in two varieties:
|
2036 |
|
|
port or memory mapped. You should know what you have. The most
|
2037 |
|
|
common card, Trantor T130B, uses port mapped mode.
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
|
|
NCR53c7,8xx SCSI support
|
2040 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C7xx
|
2041 |
|
|
This is the 53c7 and 8xx NCR family of SCSI controllers, not to be
|
2042 |
|
|
confused with the NCR 5380 controllers. It is explained in section
|
2043 |
|
|
3.8 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2044 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of the
|
2045 |
|
|
box, you may have to change some settings in
|
2046 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/53c7,8xx.h. This driver is also available as a module
|
2047 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
2048 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module,
|
2049 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2050 |
|
|
|
2051 |
|
|
Always negotiate synchronous transfers
|
2052 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C7xx_sync
|
2053 |
|
|
In general, this is good; however, it is a bit dangerous since there
|
2054 |
|
|
are some broken SCSI devices out there. Take your chances. Safe bet
|
2055 |
|
|
is N.
|
2056 |
|
|
|
2057 |
|
|
Allow FAST-SCSI [10MHz]
|
2058 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C7xx_FAST
|
2059 |
|
|
This will enable 10MHz FAST-SCSI transfers with your host adapter.
|
2060 |
|
|
Some systems have problems with that speed, so it's safest to say N
|
2061 |
|
|
here.
|
2062 |
|
|
|
2063 |
|
|
Allow DISCONNECT
|
2064 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C7xx_DISCONNECT
|
2065 |
|
|
This enables the disconnect/reconnect feature of the NCR SCSI
|
2066 |
|
|
controller. When this is enabled, a slow SCSI device will not lock
|
2067 |
|
|
the SCSI bus while processing a request, allowing simultaneous use
|
2068 |
|
|
of e.g. a SCSI hard disk and SCSI tape or CD-ROM drive, and
|
2069 |
|
|
providing much better performance when using slow and fast SCSI
|
2070 |
|
|
devices at the same time. Some devices, however, do not operate
|
2071 |
|
|
properly with this option enabled, and will cause your SCSI system
|
2072 |
|
|
to hang, which might cause a system crash. The safe answer
|
2073 |
|
|
therefore is to say N.
|
2074 |
|
|
|
2075 |
|
|
NCR53C8XX SCSI support
|
2076 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX
|
2077 |
|
|
This is the BSD ncr driver adapted to Linux for the NCR53C8XX family
|
2078 |
|
|
of PCI-SCSI controllers. This driver supports parity checking,
|
2079 |
|
|
tagged command queuing and fast synchronous data transfers up to 80
|
2080 |
|
|
MB/s with wide FAST-40 LVD devices and controllers.
|
2081 |
|
|
The NCR53C860 and NCR53C875 support FAST-20 transfers. The NCR53C895
|
2082 |
|
|
supports FAST-40 transfers with Ultra2 LVD devices.
|
2083 |
|
|
If you have a SYM53C896 PCI-SCSI controller, you may want to use the new
|
2084 |
|
|
improved driver available at ftp://ftp.tux.org/pub/roudier/896/.
|
2085 |
|
|
Please read drivers/scsi/README.ncr53c8xx for more information.
|
2086 |
|
|
|
2087 |
|
|
Synchronous data transfers frequency
|
2088 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_SYNC
|
2089 |
|
|
The SCSI Parallel Interface-2 Standard defines 4 classes of transfer
|
2090 |
|
|
rates: FAST-5, FAST-10, FAST-20 and FAST-40. The numbers are
|
2091 |
|
|
respectively the maximum data transfer rates in mega-transfers per
|
2092 |
|
|
second for each class. For example, a FAST-20 Wide 16 device is able
|
2093 |
|
|
to transfer data at 20 million 16 bit packets per second for a total
|
2094 |
|
|
rate of 40 MB/s.
|
2095 |
|
|
You may specify 0 if you want to only use asynchronous data
|
2096 |
|
|
transfers. This is the safest and slowest option. Otherwise, specify
|
2097 |
|
|
a value between 5 and 40, depending on the capability of your SCSI
|
2098 |
|
|
controller. The higher the number, the faster the data transfer.
|
2099 |
|
|
Note that 40 should normally be ok since the driver decreases the
|
2100 |
|
|
value automatically according to the controller's capabilities.
|
2101 |
|
|
Your answer to this question is ignored for controllers with NVRAM,
|
2102 |
|
|
since the driver will get this information from the user set-up. It
|
2103 |
|
|
also can be overridden using a boot setup option, as follows
|
2104 |
|
|
(example): 'ncr53c8xx=sync:12' will allow the driver to negotiate
|
2105 |
|
|
for FAST-20 synchronous data transfer (20 mega-transfers per
|
2106 |
|
|
second).
|
2107 |
|
|
The normal answer therefore is not to go with the default but to
|
2108 |
|
|
select the maximum value 40 allowing the driver to use the maximum
|
2109 |
|
|
value supported by each controller. If this causes problems with
|
2110 |
|
|
your SCSI devices, you should come back and decrease the value.
|
2111 |
|
|
There is no safe option other than using good cabling, right
|
2112 |
|
|
terminations and SCSI conformant devices.
|
2113 |
|
|
|
2114 |
|
|
Use normal IO
|
2115 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_IOMAPPED
|
2116 |
|
|
If you say Y here, the driver will use normal IO, as opposed to
|
2117 |
|
|
memory mapped IO. Memory mapped IO has less latency than normal IO
|
2118 |
|
|
and works for most Intel-based hardware. Under Linux/Alpha only
|
2119 |
|
|
normal IO is currently supported by the driver and so, this option
|
2120 |
|
|
has no effect on those systems.
|
2121 |
|
|
The normal answer therefore is N; try Y only if you encounter SCSI
|
2122 |
|
|
related problems.
|
2123 |
|
|
|
2124 |
|
|
Not allow targets to disconnect
|
2125 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_NO_DISCONNECT
|
2126 |
|
|
This option is only provided for safety if you suspect some SCSI
|
2127 |
|
|
device of yours to not support properly the target-disconnect
|
2128 |
|
|
feature. In that case, you would say Y here. In general however, to
|
2129 |
|
|
not allow targets to disconnect is not reasonable if there is more
|
2130 |
|
|
than 1 device on a SCSI bus. The normal answer therefore is N.
|
2131 |
|
|
|
2132 |
|
|
Default tagged command queue depth
|
2133 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_DEFAULT_TAGS
|
2134 |
|
|
"Tagged command queuing" is a feature of SCSI-2 which improves
|
2135 |
|
|
performance: the host adapter can send several SCSI commands to a
|
2136 |
|
|
device's queue even if previous commands haven't finished yet. Some
|
2137 |
|
|
SCSI devices don't implement this properly; if you want to disable
|
2138 |
|
|
this feature, enter 0 or 1 here (it doesn't matter which).
|
2139 |
|
|
The default value is 8 and should be supported by most hard disks.
|
2140 |
|
|
This value can be overridden from the boot command line using the
|
2141 |
|
|
'tags' option as follows (example):
|
2142 |
|
|
'ncr53c8xx=tags:4/t2t3q16/t0u2q10' will set default queue depth to
|
2143 |
|
|
4, set queue depth to 16 for target 2 and target 3 on controller 0
|
2144 |
|
|
and set queue depth to 10 for target 0 / lun 2 on controller 1.
|
2145 |
|
|
The normal answer therefore is to go with the default 8 and to use
|
2146 |
|
|
a boot command line option for devices that need to use a different
|
2147 |
|
|
command queue depth.
|
2148 |
|
|
There is no safe option other than using good SCSI devices.
|
2149 |
|
|
|
2150 |
|
|
Maximum number of queued commands
|
2151 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_MAX_TAGS
|
2152 |
|
|
This option allows you to specify the maximum number of commands
|
2153 |
|
|
that can be queued to any device, when tagged command queuing is
|
2154 |
|
|
possible. The default value is 32. Minimum is 2, maximum is 64.
|
2155 |
|
|
Modern hard disks are able to support 64 tags and even more, but
|
2156 |
|
|
donnot seem to be faster when more than 32 tags are being used.
|
2157 |
|
|
So, the normal answer here is to go with the default value 32 unless
|
2158 |
|
|
you are using very large hard disks with large cache (>= 1 MB) that
|
2159 |
|
|
are able to take advantage of more than 32 tagged commands.
|
2160 |
|
|
There is no safe option and the default answer is recommended.
|
2161 |
|
|
|
2162 |
|
|
Assume boards are SYMBIOS compatible
|
2163 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_SYMBIOS_COMPAT
|
2164 |
|
|
This option allows you to enable some features depending on GPIO
|
2165 |
|
|
wiring. These General Purpose Input/Output pins can be used for
|
2166 |
|
|
vendor specific features or implementation of the standard SYMBIOS
|
2167 |
|
|
features. Genuine SYMBIOS controllers use GPIO0 in output for
|
2168 |
|
|
controller LED and GPIO3 bit as a flag indicating
|
2169 |
|
|
singled-ended/differential interface. The Tekram DC-390U/F boards
|
2170 |
|
|
uses a different GPIO wiring.
|
2171 |
|
|
Your answer to this question is ignored if all your controllers have
|
2172 |
|
|
NVRAM, since the driver is able to detect the board type from the
|
2173 |
|
|
NVRAM format.
|
2174 |
|
|
If all the controllers in your system are genuine SYMBIOS boards or
|
2175 |
|
|
use BIOS and drivers from SYMBIOS, you would want to say Y here,
|
2176 |
|
|
otherwise N. N is the safe answer.
|
2177 |
|
|
|
2178 |
|
|
Enable profiling statistics gathering
|
2179 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C8XX_PROFILE
|
2180 |
|
|
This option allows you to enable profiling information gathering.
|
2181 |
|
|
These statistics are not very accurate due to the low frequency
|
2182 |
|
|
of the kernel clock (100 Hz on i386) and have performance impact
|
2183 |
|
|
on systems that use very fast devices.
|
2184 |
|
|
The normal answer therefore is N.
|
2185 |
|
|
|
2186 |
|
|
Always IN2000 SCSI support
|
2187 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_IN2000
|
2188 |
|
|
This is support for an ISA bus SCSI host adapter. You'll find more
|
2189 |
|
|
information in drivers/scsi/in2000.readme. If it doesn't work out
|
2190 |
|
|
of the box, you may have to change the jumpers for IRQ or address
|
2191 |
|
|
selection. If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which
|
2192 |
|
|
can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
2193 |
|
|
want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2194 |
|
|
|
2195 |
|
|
PAS16 SCSI support
|
2196 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_PAS16
|
2197 |
|
|
This is support for a SCSI host adapter. It is explained in section
|
2198 |
|
|
3.10 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2199 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of the
|
2200 |
|
|
box, you may have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/pas16.h.
|
2201 |
|
|
|
2202 |
|
|
Qlogic FAS SCSI support
|
2203 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_QLOGIC_FAS
|
2204 |
|
|
This driver works only with the ISA, VLB, and PCMCIA versions of the
|
2205 |
|
|
Qlogic FastSCSI! cards as well as any other card based on the FASXX
|
2206 |
|
|
chip (including the Control Concepts SCSI/IDE/SIO/PIO/FDC cards); it
|
2207 |
|
|
does NOT support the PCI version. The PCI versions are supported by
|
2208 |
|
|
the Qlogic ISP driver though. Information about this driver is
|
2209 |
|
|
contained in drivers/scsi/README.qlogicfas. You should also read
|
2210 |
|
|
the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2211 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also
|
2212 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2213 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2214 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2215 |
|
|
|
2216 |
|
|
Qlogic ISP SCSI support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
2217 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_QLOGIC_ISP
|
2218 |
|
|
This driver works for all QLogic PCI SCSI host adapters (IQ-PCI,
|
2219 |
|
|
IQ-PCI-10, IQ_PCI-D) except for the PCI-basic card. (This latter
|
2220 |
|
|
card is supported by the "AM53/79C974 PCI SCSI" driver.) If you
|
2221 |
|
|
say Y here, make sure to say Y to "PCI BIOS support" as well. More
|
2222 |
|
|
information is contained in the file drivers/scsi/README.qlogicisp.
|
2223 |
|
|
You should also read the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
2224 |
|
|
anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
2225 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
2226 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
2227 |
|
|
want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
2228 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2229 |
|
|
|
2230 |
|
|
Seagate ST-02 and Future Domain TMC-8xx SCSI support
|
2231 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_SEAGATE
|
2232 |
|
|
These are 8-bit SCSI controllers; the ST-01 is also supported by
|
2233 |
|
|
this driver. It is explained in section 3.9 of the SCSI-HOWTO,
|
2234 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:
|
2235 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of the box, you may
|
2236 |
|
|
have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/seagate.h.
|
2237 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
2238 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
2239 |
|
|
want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
2240 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2241 |
|
|
|
2242 |
|
|
Trantor T128/T128F/T228 SCSI support
|
2243 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_T128
|
2244 |
|
|
This is support for a SCSI host adapter. It is explained in section
|
2245 |
|
|
3.11 of the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2246 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of the
|
2247 |
|
|
box, you may have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/t128.h.
|
2248 |
|
|
Note that Trantor was recently purchased by Adaptec, and some former
|
2249 |
|
|
Trantor products are being sold under the Adaptec name.
|
2250 |
|
|
|
2251 |
|
|
UltraStor SCSI support
|
2252 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_ULTRASTOR
|
2253 |
|
|
This is support for the UltraStor 14F, 24F and 34F SCSI-2 host
|
2254 |
|
|
adapter family. This driver is explained in section 3.12 of the
|
2255 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:
|
2256 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If it doesn't work out of the box, you may
|
2257 |
|
|
have to change some settings in drivers/scsi/ultrastor.h. If you
|
2258 |
|
|
want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in
|
2259 |
|
|
and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here
|
2260 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2261 |
|
|
Note that there is also another driver for UltraStor hardware:
|
2262 |
|
|
"UltraStor 14F/34F support", above.
|
2263 |
|
|
|
2264 |
|
|
7000FASST SCSI support
|
2265 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_7000FASST
|
2266 |
|
|
This driver supports the Western Digital 7000 SCSI host adapter.
|
2267 |
|
|
Some information is in the source: drivers/scsi/wd7000.c. This
|
2268 |
|
|
driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be inserted
|
2269 |
|
|
in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want). If you
|
2270 |
|
|
want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
2271 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2272 |
|
|
|
2273 |
|
|
EATA ISA/EISA/PCI (DPT and generic EATA/DMA-compliant boards) support
|
2274 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_EATA
|
2275 |
|
|
This driver supports all the EATA/DMA-compliant SCSI host adapters
|
2276 |
|
|
and does not need any BIOS32 service.
|
2277 |
|
|
DPT ISA and all EISA i/o addresses are probed looking for the "EATA"
|
2278 |
|
|
signature. If "PCI bios support" is enabled, the addresses of all
|
2279 |
|
|
the PCI SCSI controllers reported by BIOS32 are probed as well.
|
2280 |
|
|
Note that there is also another driver for the same hardware:
|
2281 |
|
|
"EATA-DMA support". You should enable only one of them.
|
2282 |
|
|
You want to read the start of drivers/scsi/eata.c and the
|
2283 |
|
|
SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2284 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
2285 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2286 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
2287 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2288 |
|
|
|
2289 |
|
|
NCR53c406a SCSI support
|
2290 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_NCR53C406A
|
2291 |
|
|
This is support for the NCR53c406a SCSI host adapter. For user
|
2292 |
|
|
configurable parameters, check out drivers/scsi/NCR53c406.c in the
|
2293 |
|
|
kernel source. Also read the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
2294 |
|
|
anonymous) at sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to
|
2295 |
|
|
compile this driver as a module ( = code which can be inserted in
|
2296 |
|
|
and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here
|
2297 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2298 |
|
|
|
2299 |
|
|
Tekram DC390(T) and Am53/79C974 (PCscsi) SCSI support
|
2300 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_DC390T
|
2301 |
|
|
This driver supports PCI SCSI host adapters based on the Am53C974A
|
2302 |
|
|
chip, e.g. Tekram DC390(T), DawiControl 2974 and some onboard
|
2303 |
|
|
PCscsi/PCnet (Am53/79C974) solutions.
|
2304 |
|
|
Documentation can be found in linux/drivers/scsi/README.tmscsim.
|
2305 |
|
|
Note that this driver does NOT support Tekram DC390W/U/F, which are
|
2306 |
|
|
based on NCR/Symbios chips. Use the NCR53C8XX driver for those.
|
2307 |
|
|
Also note, that there is another generic Am53C974 driver.
|
2308 |
|
|
If you want to compile this driver as a module ( = code which can be
|
2309 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2310 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. The module will be
|
2311 |
|
|
called tmscsim.o.
|
2312 |
|
|
|
2313 |
|
|
Skip support for other Am53/79C974 based SCSI adapters
|
2314 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_DC390T_NOGENSUPP
|
2315 |
|
|
Normally, the DC390(T) SCSI driver relies on the DC390 EEPROM to get
|
2316 |
|
|
initial values for its settings, such as speed, termination, etc.
|
2317 |
|
|
If it can't find this EEPROM, it will use defaults or the user
|
2318 |
|
|
supplied boot/module parameters. For details on driver configuration
|
2319 |
|
|
see linux/drivers/scsi/README.tmscsim.
|
2320 |
|
|
With this option set, if no EEPROM is found, the driver gives up and
|
2321 |
|
|
thus only supports Tekram DC390(T) adapters. This can be useful if
|
2322 |
|
|
you have a DC390(T) and another Am53C974 based adapter, which, for
|
2323 |
|
|
some reason, you want to drive with the other AM53C974 driver.
|
2324 |
|
|
If unsure, say N.
|
2325 |
|
|
|
2326 |
|
|
Symbios Logic sym53c416 support
|
2327 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_SYM53C416
|
2328 |
|
|
This is support for the sym53c416 SCSI host adapter. This is the
|
2329 |
|
|
SCSI adapter that comes with some hp scanners. This driver requires that
|
2330 |
|
|
the sym53c416 is configured first using some sort of pnp configuration
|
2331 |
|
|
program (e.g. isapnp). After doing so it should be loaded as a module
|
2332 |
|
|
using insmod. The parameters of the configured card(s) should be passed
|
2333 |
|
|
to the driver. The format is:
|
2334 |
|
|
|
2335 |
|
|
insmod sym53c416 sym53c416=, [sym53c416_1=,]
|
2336 |
|
|
|
2337 |
|
|
There is support for up to four adapters. If you want to compile this
|
2338 |
|
|
driver as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from
|
2339 |
|
|
the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
2340 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2341 |
|
|
|
2342 |
|
|
AM53/79C974 PCI SCSI support
|
2343 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_AM53C974
|
2344 |
|
|
This is support for the AM53/79C974 SCSI host adapters. Please read
|
2345 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/README.AM53C974 for details. Also, the SCSI-HOWTO,
|
2346 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2347 |
|
|
ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, is for you.
|
2348 |
|
|
Note that there is another driver for AM53C974 based adapters: The
|
2349 |
|
|
Tekram DC390(T) driver.
|
2350 |
|
|
If you want to compile this driver as a module ( = code which can be
|
2351 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2352 |
|
|
|
2353 |
|
|
GDT SCSI Disk Array Controller support
|
2354 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_GDTH
|
2355 |
|
|
This is a driver for all SCSI Disk Array Controllers (EISA/ISA/PCI)
|
2356 |
|
|
manufactured by ICP vortex. It is documented in the kernel source in
|
2357 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/gdth.c and drivers/scsi/gdth.h. This driver is also
|
2358 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2359 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2360 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2361 |
|
|
|
2362 |
|
|
IOMEGA Parallel Port ZIP drive SCSI support
|
2363 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_PPA
|
2364 |
|
|
This driver supports the parallel port version of IOMEGA's ZIP drive
|
2365 |
|
|
(a 100Mb removable media device). For more information about this
|
2366 |
|
|
driver and how to use it you should read the file
|
2367 |
|
|
drivers/scsi/README.ppa. You should also read the SCSI-HOWTO, which
|
2368 |
|
|
is available via anonymous FTP from sunsite.unc.edu in the directory
|
2369 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available as a module
|
2370 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
2371 |
|
|
whenever you want. If you want to use any two of a parallel port ZIP
|
2372 |
|
|
drive, a parallel printer or PLIP on the same parallel port, you
|
2373 |
|
|
should compile the drivers as modules and only insert them as
|
2374 |
|
|
needed. To compile this driver as a module, say M here and read
|
2375 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. Note that you can say N here if you have
|
2376 |
|
|
the SCSI version of the ZIP drive: it will be supported
|
2377 |
|
|
automatically if you enabled the generic "SCSI disk support", above.
|
2378 |
|
|
|
2379 |
|
|
IOMEGA ZIP drive -- Buggy EPP chipset support
|
2380 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_PPA_HAVE_PEDANTIC
|
2381 |
|
|
Contacts with the Iomega driver development team indicate there are
|
2382 |
|
|
a few reputably bad EPP implementations in existance. The following
|
2383 |
|
|
mainboard chipsets will probably require the PEDANTIC option to
|
2384 |
|
|
reliably transfer data:
|
2385 |
|
|
Winbond xxx837
|
2386 |
|
|
National Semiconductor PC87306 (early revisions)
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
Initio INI-A100U2W SCSI support
|
2389 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_INIA100
|
2390 |
|
|
This is support for the Initio INI-A100U2W SCSI host adapter.
|
2391 |
|
|
Please read the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user anonymous) at
|
2392 |
|
|
ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
2393 |
|
|
|
2394 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
2395 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2396 |
|
|
say M here and read Documenation/modules.txt. The module will be
|
2397 |
|
|
called a100u2w.o
|
2398 |
|
|
|
2399 |
|
|
Network device support?
|
2400 |
|
|
CONFIG_NETDEVICES
|
2401 |
|
|
You can say N here in case you don't intend to connect to any other
|
2402 |
|
|
computer at all or all your connections will be either via UUCP
|
2403 |
|
|
(UUCP is a protocol to forward mail and news between unix hosts over
|
2404 |
|
|
telephone lines; read the UUCP-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
2405 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO) or dialing up a
|
2406 |
|
|
shell account or a BBS, even using term (term is a program which
|
2407 |
|
|
gives you almost full Internet connectivity if you have a regular
|
2408 |
|
|
dial up shell account on some Internet connected Unix computer. Read
|
2409 |
|
|
the Term-HOWTO). You'll have to say Y if your computer contains a
|
2410 |
|
|
network card that you want to use under Linux (make sure you know
|
2411 |
|
|
its name because you will be asked for it and read the
|
2412 |
|
|
Ethernet-HOWTO; also, if you plan to use more than one network card
|
2413 |
|
|
under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2414 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini) or if you want to use
|
2415 |
|
|
SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol is the protocol used to send
|
2416 |
|
|
Internet traffic over telephone lines or nullmodem cables) or CSLIP
|
2417 |
|
|
(compressed SLIP) or PPP (better and newer variant of SLIP) or PLIP
|
2418 |
|
|
(Parallel Line Internet Protocol is mainly used to create a mini
|
2419 |
|
|
network by connecting the parallel ports of two local machines) or
|
2420 |
|
|
AX.25/KISS (protocol for sending internet traffic over radio links).
|
2421 |
|
|
Make sure to read the NET-2-HOWTO. Eventually, you will have to
|
2422 |
|
|
read Olaf Kirch's excellent book "Network Administrator's Guide", to
|
2423 |
|
|
be found in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/LDP. If unsure, say Y.
|
2424 |
|
|
|
2425 |
|
|
Ethernet (10 or 100Mbit)
|
2426 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_ETHERNET
|
2427 |
|
|
Ethernet is the most common protocol used on Local Area Networks
|
2428 |
|
|
(LANs) in universities or companies. 10-base-2 and 10-base-T and
|
2429 |
|
|
100-base- are common types of Ethernet. If your Linux
|
2430 |
|
|
machine will be connected to an Ethernet and you have an Ethernet
|
2431 |
|
|
network card installed in your computer, say Y here and read the
|
2432 |
|
|
Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
2433 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that the answer to this
|
2434 |
|
|
question won't directly affect the kernel: saying N will just cause
|
2435 |
|
|
this configure script to skip all the questions about Ethernet
|
2436 |
|
|
network cards. If unsure, say N.
|
2437 |
|
|
|
2438 |
|
|
Dummy net driver support
|
2439 |
|
|
CONFIG_DUMMY
|
2440 |
|
|
This is essentially a bit-bucket device (i.e. traffic you send to
|
2441 |
|
|
this device is consigned into oblivion) with a configurable IP
|
2442 |
|
|
address. It is most commonly used in order to make your currently
|
2443 |
|
|
inactive SLIP address seem like a real address for local programs.
|
2444 |
|
|
If you use SLIP or PPP, you might want to enable it. Read about it
|
2445 |
|
|
in the Network Administrator's Guide, available via FTP (user:
|
2446 |
|
|
anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/LDP. Since this
|
2447 |
|
|
thing comes often handy, the default is Y. It won't enlarge your
|
2448 |
|
|
kernel either. What a deal. If you want to compile this as a
|
2449 |
|
|
module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2450 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
2451 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If you want to use more than one dummy
|
2452 |
|
|
device at a time, you need to compile it as a module. Instead of
|
2453 |
|
|
'dummy', it will they will then be called 'dummy0', 'dummy1' etc.
|
2454 |
|
|
|
2455 |
|
|
SLIP (serial line) support
|
2456 |
|
|
CONFIG_SLIP
|
2457 |
|
|
Say Y if you intend to use SLIP or CSLIP (compressed SLIP) to
|
2458 |
|
|
connect to your Internet service provider or to connect to some
|
2459 |
|
|
other local Unix box or if you want to configure your Linux box as
|
2460 |
|
|
a Slip/CSlip server for other people to dial in. SLIP (Serial Line
|
2461 |
|
|
Internet Protocol) is the protocol used to send Internet traffic
|
2462 |
|
|
over telephone lines or serial cables (also known as nullmodems).
|
2463 |
|
|
Normally, your access provider has to support SLIP in order for you
|
2464 |
|
|
to be able to use it, but there is now a SLIP emulator called SLiRP
|
2465 |
|
|
around (available via FTP (user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:
|
2466 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/system/Network/serial/) which allows you to use SLIP over
|
2467 |
|
|
a regular dial up shell connection. If you plan to use SLiRP, make
|
2468 |
|
|
sure to say Y to CSLIP, below. The NET-2-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
2469 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, explains
|
2470 |
|
|
how to configure SLIP. Note that you don't need this option if you
|
2471 |
|
|
just want to run term (term is a program which gives you almost full
|
2472 |
|
|
Internet connectivity if you have a regular dial up shell account on
|
2473 |
|
|
some Internet connected Unix computer. Read the Term-HOWTO). SLIP
|
2474 |
|
|
support will enlarge your kernel by about 4kB. If unsure, say N.
|
2475 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
2476 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2477 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2478 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2479 |
|
|
|
2480 |
|
|
CSLIP compressed headers
|
2481 |
|
|
CONFIG_SLIP_COMPRESSED
|
2482 |
|
|
This protocol is faster than SLIP because it uses compression on the
|
2483 |
|
|
TCP/IP headers (not on the data itself), but it has to be supported
|
2484 |
|
|
on both ends. Ask your access provider if you are not sure and
|
2485 |
|
|
say Y, just in case. You will still be able to use plain SLIP. If
|
2486 |
|
|
you plan to use SLiRP, the SLIP emulator (available via FTP (user:
|
2487 |
|
|
anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Network/serial/)
|
2488 |
|
|
which allows you to use SLIP over a regular dial up shell
|
2489 |
|
|
connection, you definitely want to say Y here.
|
2490 |
|
|
The NET-2-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2491 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, explains how to configure
|
2492 |
|
|
CSLIP. This won't enlarge your kernel.
|
2493 |
|
|
|
2494 |
|
|
Keepalive and linefill
|
2495 |
|
|
CONFIG_SLIP_SMART
|
2496 |
|
|
Adds additional capabilities to the SLIP driver to support the
|
2497 |
|
|
RELCOM line fill and keepalive monitoring. Ideal on poor quality
|
2498 |
|
|
analogue lines.
|
2499 |
|
|
|
2500 |
|
|
Six bit SLIP encapsulation
|
2501 |
|
|
CONFIG_SLIP_MODE_SLIP6
|
2502 |
|
|
Just occasionally you may need to run IP over hostile serial
|
2503 |
|
|
networks that don't pass all control characters or are only seven
|
2504 |
|
|
bit. Saying Y here adds an extra mode you can use with SLIP:
|
2505 |
|
|
"slip6". In this mode, SLIP will only send normal ascii symbols
|
2506 |
|
|
over the serial device. Naturally, this has to be supported at the
|
2507 |
|
|
other end of the link as well. It's good enough, for example, to
|
2508 |
|
|
run IP over the async ports of a Camtec JNT Pad. If unsure, say N.
|
2509 |
|
|
|
2510 |
|
|
Radio network interfaces
|
2511 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_RADIO
|
2512 |
|
|
Radio based interfaces for Linux. This includes amateur radio
|
2513 |
|
|
(AX.25), support for wireless Ethernet and other systems. Note that
|
2514 |
|
|
the answer to this question won't directly affect the kernel:
|
2515 |
|
|
saying N will just cause this configure script to skip all the
|
2516 |
|
|
questions about radio interfaces. Some user-level drivers for scarab
|
2517 |
|
|
devices which don't require special kernel support are available via
|
2518 |
|
|
FTP (user: anonymous) from shadow.cabi.net. If unsure, say N.
|
2519 |
|
|
|
2520 |
|
|
PPP (point-to-point) support
|
2521 |
|
|
CONFIG_PPP
|
2522 |
|
|
PPP (Point to Point Protocol) is a newer and better SLIP. It serves
|
2523 |
|
|
the same purpose: sending Internet traffic over telephone (and other
|
2524 |
|
|
serial) lines. Ask your access provider if they support it, because
|
2525 |
|
|
otherwise you can't use it (not quite true any more: the free
|
2526 |
|
|
program SLiRP can emulate a PPP line if you just have a regular dial
|
2527 |
|
|
up shell account on some UNIX computer; get it via FTP (user:
|
2528 |
|
|
anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Network/serial/).
|
2529 |
|
|
To use PPP, you need an additional program called pppd as described
|
2530 |
|
|
in Documentation/networking/ppp.txt and in the PPP-HOWTO, available
|
2531 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that you don't need
|
2532 |
|
|
this option if you just want to run term (term is a program which
|
2533 |
|
|
gives you almost full Internet connectivity if you have a regular
|
2534 |
|
|
dial up shell account on some Internet connected UNIX computer. Read
|
2535 |
|
|
the Term-HOWTO). The PPP option enlarges your kernel by about 16kB.
|
2536 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
2537 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want).
|
2538 |
|
|
If you said Y to "Version information on all symbols" above, then
|
2539 |
|
|
you cannot compile the PPP driver into the kernel; you can only
|
2540 |
|
|
compile it as a module. If you want to compile it as a module,
|
2541 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2542 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. Note that, no matter what
|
2543 |
|
|
you do, the BSD compression code (used to compress the IP packets
|
2544 |
|
|
sent over the serial line; has to be supported at the other end as
|
2545 |
|
|
well) can only be compiled as a module; it is called bsd_comp.o and
|
2546 |
|
|
will show up in the directory modules once you have said "make
|
2547 |
|
|
modules". If unsure, say N.
|
2548 |
|
|
|
2549 |
|
|
16 channels instead of 4
|
2550 |
|
|
CONFIG_PPP_LOTS
|
2551 |
|
|
Saying Y here will allow you to have up to 16 PPP connections
|
2552 |
|
|
running in parallel. This is mainly useful if you intend your
|
2553 |
|
|
Linux box to act as a dial-in PPP server. Most people can say N.
|
2554 |
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
STRIP (Starmode Radio IP) support
|
2556 |
|
|
CONFIG_STRIP
|
2557 |
|
|
Say Y if you have a Metricom radio and intend to use Starmode Radio
|
2558 |
|
|
IP. STRIP is a radio protocol developed for the MosquitoNet project
|
2559 |
|
|
(http://mosquitonet.stanford.edu/) to send Internet traffic using
|
2560 |
|
|
Metricom radios. Metricom radios are small, battery powered,
|
2561 |
|
|
100kbit/sec packet radio transceivers, about the size and weight of
|
2562 |
|
|
a cellular telephone. (You may also have heard them called
|
2563 |
|
|
"Metricom modems" but we avoid the term "modem" because it misleads
|
2564 |
|
|
many people into thinking that you can plug a Metricom modem into a
|
2565 |
|
|
phone line and use it as a modem.) You can use STRIP on any Linux
|
2566 |
|
|
machine with a serial port, although it is obviously most useful for
|
2567 |
|
|
people with laptop computers. If you think you might get a Metricom
|
2568 |
|
|
radio in the future, there is no harm in saying yes to STRIP now,
|
2569 |
|
|
except that it makes the kernel a bit bigger.
|
2570 |
|
|
|
2571 |
|
|
WIC (Radio IP bridge)
|
2572 |
|
|
CONFIG_WIC
|
2573 |
|
|
Support for the WIC parallel port radio bridge. You'll probably want
|
2574 |
|
|
to say N. If you want to compile this driver as a module though
|
2575 |
|
|
(= code which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
2576 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2577 |
|
|
|
2578 |
|
|
Z8530 SCC kiss emulation driver for AX.25
|
2579 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCC
|
2580 |
|
|
These cards are used to connect your Linux box to an amateur radio
|
2581 |
|
|
in order to communicate with other computers. If you want to use
|
2582 |
|
|
this, read Documentation/networking/z8530drv.txt and the HAM-HOWTO,
|
2583 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
2584 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
2585 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2586 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
2587 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2588 |
|
|
|
2589 |
|
|
BAYCOM ser12 and par96 driver for AX.25
|
2590 |
|
|
CONFIG_BAYCOM
|
2591 |
|
|
This is an experimental driver for Baycom style simple amateur radio
|
2592 |
|
|
modems that connect to either a serial interface or a parallel
|
2593 |
|
|
interface. The driver supports the ser12 and par96 designs. To
|
2594 |
|
|
configure the driver, use the sethdlc utility available in the
|
2595 |
|
|
standard ax25 utilities package. For information on the modems, see
|
2596 |
|
|
http://www.baycom.de and drivers/net/README.baycom.
|
2597 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
2598 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2599 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. This is recommended.
|
2600 |
|
|
|
2601 |
|
|
Sound card modem driver for AX.25
|
2602 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM
|
2603 |
|
|
This experimental driver allows a standard SoundBlaster or
|
2604 |
|
|
WindowsSoundSystem compatible sound card to be used as a packet
|
2605 |
|
|
radio modem (NOT as a telephone modem!), to send digital traffic
|
2606 |
|
|
over amateur radio.
|
2607 |
|
|
To configure the driver, use the sethdlc, smdiag and smmixer
|
2608 |
|
|
utilities available in the standard ax25 utilities package. For
|
2609 |
|
|
information on how to key the transmitter, see
|
2610 |
|
|
http://www.ife.ee.ethz.ch/~sailer/pcf/ptt_circ/ptt.html (to browse
|
2611 |
|
|
the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that
|
2612 |
|
|
has a program like lynx or netscape) and
|
2613 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/soundmodem.txt.
|
2614 |
|
|
If you want to compile this driver as a module ( = code which can be
|
2615 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2616 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. This is recommended.
|
2617 |
|
|
The module will be called soundmodem.o.
|
2618 |
|
|
|
2619 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for SoundBlaster and compatible cards
|
2620 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_SBC
|
2621 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver to use SoundBlaster and
|
2622 |
|
|
compatible cards. If you have a dual mode card (i.e. a WSS cards
|
2623 |
|
|
with a SoundBlaster emulation) you should say N here and Y to
|
2624 |
|
|
"Sound card modem support for WSS and Crystal cards", below, because
|
2625 |
|
|
this usually results in better performance. This option also
|
2626 |
|
|
supports SB16/32/64 in full duplex mode.
|
2627 |
|
|
|
2628 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for WSS and Crystal cards
|
2629 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_WSS
|
2630 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver to use WindowsSoundSystem
|
2631 |
|
|
compatible cards. These cards feature a codec chip from either
|
2632 |
|
|
Analog Devices (such as AD1848, AD1845, AD1812) or Crystal
|
2633 |
|
|
Semiconductors (such as CS4248, CS423x). This option also supports
|
2634 |
|
|
the WSS full duplex operation which currently works with Crystal
|
2635 |
|
|
CS423x chips. If you don't need full duplex operation, do not enable
|
2636 |
|
|
it to save performance.
|
2637 |
|
|
|
2638 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 1200 baud AFSK modulation
|
2639 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_AFSK1200
|
2640 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 1200 baud AFSK modem,
|
2641 |
|
|
compatible to popular modems using TCM3105 or AM7911.
|
2642 |
|
|
The demodulator requires about 12% of the CPU power of a Pentium 75
|
2643 |
|
|
CPU per channel.
|
2644 |
|
|
|
2645 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 2400 baud AFSK modulation (7.3728MHz crystal)
|
2646 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_AFSK2400_7
|
2647 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 2400 baud AFSK modem,
|
2648 |
|
|
compatible to TCM3105 modems (over-)clocked with a 7.3728MHz
|
2649 |
|
|
crystal. Note that the availability of this driver does _not_ imply
|
2650 |
|
|
that I recommend building such links. It is only here since users
|
2651 |
|
|
especially in eastern Europe have asked me to do so. In fact this
|
2652 |
|
|
modulation scheme has many disadvantages, mainly its incompatibility
|
2653 |
|
|
with many transceiver designs and the fact that the TCM3105 (if
|
2654 |
|
|
used) is operated widely outside its specifications.
|
2655 |
|
|
|
2656 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 2400 baud AFSK modulation (8MHz crystal)
|
2657 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_AFSK2400_8
|
2658 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 2400 baud AFSK modem,
|
2659 |
|
|
compatible to TCM3105 modems (over-)clocked with an 8MHz crystal.
|
2660 |
|
|
Note that the availability of this driver does _not_ imply that
|
2661 |
|
|
I recommend building such links. It is only here since users
|
2662 |
|
|
especially in eastern Europe have asked me to do so. In fact this
|
2663 |
|
|
modulation scheme has many disadvantages, mainly its incompatibility
|
2664 |
|
|
with many transceiver designs and the fact that the TCM3105 (if
|
2665 |
|
|
used) is operated widely outside its specifications.
|
2666 |
|
|
|
2667 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 2666 baud AFSK modulation
|
2668 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_AFSK2666
|
2669 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 2666 baud AFSK modem.
|
2670 |
|
|
This modem is experimental, and not compatible to anything
|
2671 |
|
|
else I know of.
|
2672 |
|
|
|
2673 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 4800 baud 8PSK modulation
|
2674 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_PSK4800
|
2675 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 4800 baud 8PSK modem.
|
2676 |
|
|
This modem is experimental, and not compatible to anything
|
2677 |
|
|
else I know of.
|
2678 |
|
|
|
2679 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 4800 baud HAPN-1 modulation
|
2680 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_HAPN4800
|
2681 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 4800 baud HAPN-1
|
2682 |
|
|
compatible modem. This modulation seems to be widely used 'down
|
2683 |
|
|
under' and in the Netherlands. Here, nobody uses it, so I could not
|
2684 |
|
|
test if it works. It is compatible to itself, however :-)
|
2685 |
|
|
|
2686 |
|
|
Sound card modem support for 9600 baud FSK G3RUH modulation
|
2687 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUNDMODEM_FSK9600
|
2688 |
|
|
This option enables the soundmodem driver 9600 baud FSK modem,
|
2689 |
|
|
compatible to the G3RUH standard. The demodulator requires about 4%
|
2690 |
|
|
of the CPU power of a Pentium 75 CPU per channel. You can say Y to
|
2691 |
|
|
both 1200 baud AFSK and 9600 baud FSK if you want (but obviously you
|
2692 |
|
|
can only use one protocol at a time, depending on what the other end
|
2693 |
|
|
can understand).
|
2694 |
|
|
|
2695 |
|
|
PLIP (parallel port) support
|
2696 |
|
|
CONFIG_PLIP
|
2697 |
|
|
PLIP (Parallel Line Internet Protocol) is used to create a mini
|
2698 |
|
|
network consisting of two (or, rarely, more) local machines. The
|
2699 |
|
|
parallel ports (the connectors at the computers with 25 holes) are
|
2700 |
|
|
connected using "null printer" or "Turbo Laplink" cables which can
|
2701 |
|
|
transmit 4 bits at a time or using special PLIP cables, to be used
|
2702 |
|
|
on bidirectional parallel ports only, which can transmit 8 bits at a
|
2703 |
|
|
time (you can find the wiring of these cables in
|
2704 |
|
|
drivers/net/README?.plip). The cables can be up to 15m long. This
|
2705 |
|
|
works also if one of the machines runs DOS/Windows and has some PLIP
|
2706 |
|
|
software installed, e.g. the Crynwr PLIP packet driver
|
2707 |
|
|
(http://sunsite.cnam.fr/packages/Telnet/PC/msdos/misc/pktdrvr.txt)
|
2708 |
|
|
and winsock or NCSA's telnet. If you want to use this, say Y and
|
2709 |
|
|
read the PLIP mini-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2710 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini as well as the
|
2711 |
|
|
NET-2-HOWTO in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that the
|
2712 |
|
|
PLIP protocol was changed and this PLIP driver won't work together
|
2713 |
|
|
with the PLIP support in Linux versions 1.0.x. This option enlarges
|
2714 |
|
|
your kernel by about 8kB.
|
2715 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
2716 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2717 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2718 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2719 |
|
|
If you want to use both a parallel printer and PLIP, there are two
|
2720 |
|
|
cases:
|
2721 |
|
|
1) If the printer and the PLIP cable are to use the same parallel
|
2722 |
|
|
port (presumably because you have just one), it is best to compile
|
2723 |
|
|
both drivers as modules and load and unload them as needed.
|
2724 |
|
|
2) To use different parallel ports for the printer and the PLIP
|
2725 |
|
|
cable, you can say Y to the printer driver, specify the base address
|
2726 |
|
|
of the parallel port(s) to use for the printer(s) with the "lp"
|
2727 |
|
|
kernel command line option. (See the documentation of your boot
|
2728 |
|
|
loader (lilo or loadlin) about how to pass options to the kernel at
|
2729 |
|
|
boot time. The lilo procedure is also explained in the SCSI-HOWTO,
|
2730 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:
|
2731 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.) The standard base addresses as well as the
|
2732 |
|
|
syntax of the "lp" command line option can be found in
|
2733 |
|
|
drivers/char/lp.c. You can then say Y to this PLIP driver or,
|
2734 |
|
|
preferably, M in which case Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt
|
2735 |
|
|
tells you how to specify the port and IRQ to be used by PLIP at
|
2736 |
|
|
module load time.
|
2737 |
|
|
It's safe to say N here.
|
2738 |
|
|
|
2739 |
|
|
EQL (serial line load balancing) support
|
2740 |
|
|
CONFIG_EQUALIZER
|
2741 |
|
|
If you have two serial connections to some other computer (this
|
2742 |
|
|
usually requires two modems and two telephone lines) and you use
|
2743 |
|
|
SLIP ( = the protocol for sending internet traffic over telephone
|
2744 |
|
|
lines) or PPP ( = a better SLIP) on them, you can make them behave
|
2745 |
|
|
like one double speed connection using this driver. Naturally, this
|
2746 |
|
|
has to be supported at the other end as well, either with a similar
|
2747 |
|
|
EQL Linux driver or with a Livingston Portmaster 2e. Say Y if you
|
2748 |
|
|
want this and read drivers/net/README.eql. This driver is also
|
2749 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2750 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2751 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2752 |
|
|
|
2753 |
|
|
Frame Relay (DLCI) support
|
2754 |
|
|
CONFIG_DLCI
|
2755 |
|
|
This is support for the frame relay protocol; frame relay is a fast
|
2756 |
|
|
low-cost way to connect to a remote Internet access provider or to
|
2757 |
|
|
form a private wide area network. The one physical line from your
|
2758 |
|
|
box to the local "switch" (i.e. the entry point to the frame relay
|
2759 |
|
|
network, usually at the phone company) can carry several logical
|
2760 |
|
|
point-to-point connections to other computers connected to the frame
|
2761 |
|
|
relay network. For a general explanation of the protocol, check out
|
2762 |
|
|
http://frame-relay.indiana.edu/4000/4000index.html on the WWW. (To
|
2763 |
|
|
browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet
|
2764 |
|
|
that has one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic.) To use frame
|
2765 |
|
|
relay, you need supporting hardware (FRAD) and certain programs from
|
2766 |
|
|
the net-tools package as explained in
|
2767 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/framerelay.txt. This driver is also
|
2768 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2769 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2770 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2771 |
|
|
|
2772 |
|
|
Max open DLCI
|
2773 |
|
|
CONFIG_DLCI_COUNT
|
2774 |
|
|
This is the maximal number of logical point-to-point frame relay
|
2775 |
|
|
connections (the identifiers of which are called DCLIs) that
|
2776 |
|
|
the driver can handle. The default is probably fine.
|
2777 |
|
|
|
2778 |
|
|
Max DLCI per device
|
2779 |
|
|
CONFIG_DLCI_MAX
|
2780 |
|
|
You can specify here how many logical point-to-point frame relay
|
2781 |
|
|
connections (the identifiers of which are called DCLIs) should be
|
2782 |
|
|
handled by each of your hardware frame relay access devices. Go with
|
2783 |
|
|
the default.
|
2784 |
|
|
|
2785 |
|
|
Sangoma S502A FRAD support
|
2786 |
|
|
CONFIG_SDLA
|
2787 |
|
|
Say Y here if you need a driver for the Sangoma S502A, S502E, and
|
2788 |
|
|
S508 Frame Relay Access Devices. These are multi-protocol cards,
|
2789 |
|
|
but only frame relay is supported by the driver at this time.
|
2790 |
|
|
Please read Documentation/framerelay.txt. This driver is also
|
2791 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2792 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2793 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
2794 |
|
|
|
2795 |
|
|
Sun LANCE Ethernet support
|
2796 |
|
|
CONFIG_SUN_LANCE
|
2797 |
|
|
This is support for lance Ethernet cards on Sun workstations such as
|
2798 |
|
|
the SPARCstation IPC (any SPARC with a network interface 'le0' under
|
2799 |
|
|
SunOS basically).
|
2800 |
|
|
|
2801 |
|
|
Sun Intel Ethernet support
|
2802 |
|
|
CONFIG_SUN_INTEL
|
2803 |
|
|
This is support for the Intel Ethernet cards on some Sun
|
2804 |
|
|
workstations (all those with a network interface 'ie0' under SunOS).
|
2805 |
|
|
|
2806 |
|
|
Western Digital/SMC cards
|
2807 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_VENDOR_SMC
|
2808 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card belonging to this class, say Y
|
2809 |
|
|
and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2810 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan to use more than
|
2811 |
|
|
one network card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO,
|
2812 |
|
|
available from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. Note that
|
2813 |
|
|
the answer to this question doesn't directly affect the kernel:
|
2814 |
|
|
saying N will just cause this configure script to skip all the
|
2815 |
|
|
questions about Western Digital cards. If you say Y, you will be
|
2816 |
|
|
asked for your specific card in the following questions.
|
2817 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2818 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2819 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2820 |
|
|
|
2821 |
|
|
WD80*3 support
|
2822 |
|
|
CONFIG_WD80x3
|
2823 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2824 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2825 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
2826 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2827 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
2828 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2829 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2830 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2831 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2832 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2833 |
|
|
|
2834 |
|
|
SMC Ultra support
|
2835 |
|
|
CONFIG_ULTRA
|
2836 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2837 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2838 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also
|
2839 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2840 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2841 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
2842 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use
|
2843 |
|
|
more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
2844 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2845 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2846 |
|
|
Important: There have been many reports that, with some motherboards
|
2847 |
|
|
mixing an SMC Ultra and an Adaptec AHA1542 SCSI card causes
|
2848 |
|
|
corruption problems with many operating systems.
|
2849 |
|
|
|
2850 |
|
|
SMC Ultra32 support
|
2851 |
|
|
CONFIG_ULTRA32
|
2852 |
|
|
This is support for the SMC Ultra32 EISA card in shared memory mode.
|
2853 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2854 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2855 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also
|
2856 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2857 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2858 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
2859 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use
|
2860 |
|
|
more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
2861 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2862 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2863 |
|
|
|
2864 |
|
|
SMC 9194 Support
|
2865 |
|
|
CONFIG_SMC9194
|
2866 |
|
|
This is support for the SMC9xxx based Ethernet cards. Choose this
|
2867 |
|
|
option if you have a DELL laptop with the docking station, or
|
2868 |
|
|
another SMC9192/9194 based chipset. Say Y if you want it compiled
|
2869 |
|
|
into the kernel, and read the file drivers/net/README.smc9 and
|
2870 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2871 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also
|
2872 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2873 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2874 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
2875 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use
|
2876 |
|
|
more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
2877 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2878 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2879 |
|
|
|
2880 |
|
|
AMD LANCE and PCnet (AT1500 and NE2100) support
|
2881 |
|
|
CONFIG_LANCE
|
2882 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2883 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2884 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan to use more than
|
2885 |
|
|
one network card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO,
|
2886 |
|
|
available from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2887 |
|
|
|
2888 |
|
|
3COM cards
|
2889 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_VENDOR_3COM
|
2890 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card belonging to this class, say Y
|
2891 |
|
|
and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2892 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that the answer to this
|
2893 |
|
|
question doesn't directly affect the kernel: saying N will just
|
2894 |
|
|
cause this configure script to skip all the questions about 3COM
|
2895 |
|
|
cards. If you say Y, you will be asked for your specific card in the
|
2896 |
|
|
following questions. If you plan to use more than one network card
|
2897 |
|
|
under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2898 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2899 |
|
|
|
2900 |
|
|
3c501 support
|
2901 |
|
|
CONFIG_EL1
|
2902 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2903 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2904 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Also, consider buying a new
|
2905 |
|
|
card, since the 3c501 is slow and obsolete. This driver is also
|
2906 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
2907 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
2908 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
2909 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2910 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2911 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2912 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini -- and don't use 3c501s.
|
2913 |
|
|
|
2914 |
|
|
3c503 support
|
2915 |
|
|
CONFIG_EL2
|
2916 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2917 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2918 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
2919 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2920 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
2921 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2922 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2923 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2924 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2925 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2926 |
|
|
|
2927 |
|
|
3c505 support
|
2928 |
|
|
CONFIG_ELPLUS
|
2929 |
|
|
Information about this network (Ethernet) card can be found in
|
2930 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/3c505.txt. If you have a card of this type,
|
2931 |
|
|
say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
2932 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to
|
2933 |
|
|
compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
2934 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
2935 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2936 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2937 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2938 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2939 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2940 |
|
|
|
2941 |
|
|
3c507 support
|
2942 |
|
|
CONFIG_EL16
|
2943 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2944 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2945 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
2946 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2947 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
2948 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2949 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
2950 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
2951 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2952 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2953 |
|
|
|
2954 |
|
|
3c509/3c579 support
|
2955 |
|
|
CONFIG_EL3
|
2956 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card belonging to the 3Com
|
2957 |
|
|
EtherLinkIII series, say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available
|
2958 |
|
|
via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
2959 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
2960 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
2961 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2962 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
2963 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
2964 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2965 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. If your card is not
|
2966 |
|
|
working you may need to use the DOS setup disk to disable Plug &
|
2967 |
|
|
Play mode, and to select the default media type.
|
2968 |
|
|
|
2969 |
|
|
3c590 series (592/595/597) "Vortex" support
|
2970 |
|
|
CONFIG_VORTEX
|
2971 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
2972 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
2973 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. More specific information is
|
2974 |
|
|
in Documentation/networking/vortex.txt and in the comments at the
|
2975 |
|
|
beginning of drivers/net/3c59x.c. If you want to compile this
|
2976 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
2977 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
2978 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
2979 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
2980 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
2981 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2982 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2983 |
|
|
|
2984 |
|
|
Other ISA cards
|
2985 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_ISA
|
2986 |
|
|
If your network (Ethernet) card hasn't been mentioned yet and its
|
2987 |
|
|
bus system (that's the way the components of the card talk to each
|
2988 |
|
|
other) is ISA (as opposed to EISA, VLB or PCI), say Y. Make sure you
|
2989 |
|
|
know the name of your card. Read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via
|
2990 |
|
|
FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If
|
2991 |
|
|
unsure, say Y. Note that the answer to this question doesn't
|
2992 |
|
|
directly affect the kernel: saying N will just cause this configure
|
2993 |
|
|
script to skip all the remaining ISA network card questions. If you
|
2994 |
|
|
say Y, you will be asked for your specific card in the following
|
2995 |
|
|
questions. If you plan to use more than one network card under
|
2996 |
|
|
Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
2997 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
2998 |
|
|
|
2999 |
|
|
ARCnet support
|
3000 |
|
|
CONFIG_ARCNET
|
3001 |
|
|
If you have a network card of this type, say Y and check out the
|
3002 |
|
|
(arguably) beautiful poetry in Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt.
|
3003 |
|
|
You might also want to have a look at the Ethernet-HOWTO, available
|
3004 |
|
|
via FTP (user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO
|
3005 |
|
|
(even though ARCnet is not really Ethernet). This driver is also
|
3006 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
3007 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
3008 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
3009 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to
|
3010 |
|
|
use more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3011 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3012 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3013 |
|
|
|
3014 |
|
|
Enable arc0e (ARCnet "ether-encap" packet format)
|
3015 |
|
|
CONFIG_ARCNET_ETH
|
3016 |
|
|
This allows you to use "Ethernet encapsulation" with your ARCnet
|
3017 |
|
|
card via the virtual arc0e device. You only need arc0e if you want
|
3018 |
|
|
to talk to nonstandard ARCnet software, specifically,
|
3019 |
|
|
DOS/Windows-style "NDIS" drivers. You do not need to enable this
|
3020 |
|
|
option to communicate with industry-standard RFC1201
|
3021 |
|
|
implementations, like the arcether.com packet driver or most
|
3022 |
|
|
DOS/Windows ODI drivers. RFC1201 is included automatically as the
|
3023 |
|
|
arc0 device. Please read the ARCnet documentation in
|
3024 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt for more information about
|
3025 |
|
|
using arc0e and arc0s.
|
3026 |
|
|
|
3027 |
|
|
Enable arc0s (ARCnet RFC1051 packet format)
|
3028 |
|
|
CONFIG_ARCNET_1051
|
3029 |
|
|
This allows you to use RFC1051 with your ARCnet card via the virtual
|
3030 |
|
|
arc0s device. You only need arc0s if you want to talk to ARCnet
|
3031 |
|
|
software complying with the "old" standard, specifically, the DOS
|
3032 |
|
|
arcnet.com packet driver, Amigas running AmiTCP, and some variants
|
3033 |
|
|
of NetBSD. You do not need to enable this option to communicate with
|
3034 |
|
|
industry-standard RFC1201 implementations, like the arcether.com
|
3035 |
|
|
packet driver or most DOS/Windows ODI drivers. RFC1201 is included
|
3036 |
|
|
automatically as the arc0 device. Please read the ARCnet
|
3037 |
|
|
documentation in Documentation/networking/arcnet.txt for more
|
3038 |
|
|
information about using arc0e and arc0s.
|
3039 |
|
|
|
3040 |
|
|
Cabletron E21xx support
|
3041 |
|
|
CONFIG_E2100
|
3042 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3043 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3044 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3045 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3046 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3047 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3048 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3049 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3050 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3051 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3052 |
|
|
|
3053 |
|
|
DEPCA support
|
3054 |
|
|
CONFIG_DEPCA
|
3055 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3056 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3057 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO as well as
|
3058 |
|
|
drivers/net/depca.c. If you want to compile this as a module
|
3059 |
|
|
(= code which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
3060 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
3061 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use
|
3062 |
|
|
more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3063 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3064 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3065 |
|
|
|
3066 |
|
|
EtherWorks 3 support
|
3067 |
|
|
CONFIG_EWRK3
|
3068 |
|
|
This driver supports the DE203, DE204 and DE205 network (Ethernet)
|
3069 |
|
|
cards. If this is for you, say Y and read drivers/net/README.ewrk3
|
3070 |
|
|
in the kernel source as well as the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via
|
3071 |
|
|
FTP (user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
3072 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
3073 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
3074 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3075 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
3076 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3077 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3078 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3079 |
|
|
|
3080 |
|
|
SEEQ8005 support
|
3081 |
|
|
CONFIG_SEEQ8005
|
3082 |
|
|
This is a driver for the SEEQ 8005 network (Ethernet) card. If this
|
3083 |
|
|
is for you, read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
3084 |
|
|
anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan
|
3085 |
|
|
to use more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3086 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3087 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3088 |
|
|
|
3089 |
|
|
AT1700 support
|
3090 |
|
|
CONFIG_AT1700
|
3091 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3092 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3093 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3094 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3095 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3096 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3097 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3098 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3099 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3100 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3101 |
|
|
|
3102 |
|
|
FMV-181/182/183/184 support
|
3103 |
|
|
CONFIG_FMV18X
|
3104 |
|
|
If you have a Fujitsu FMV-181/182/183/184 network (Ethernet) card,
|
3105 |
|
|
say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
3106 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
3107 |
|
|
This driver is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
3108 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want).
|
3109 |
|
|
If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
3110 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3111 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3112 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3113 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3114 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3115 |
|
|
If you use FMV-183 or FMV-184 and it is not working, you may need
|
3116 |
|
|
to disable Plug & Play mode of the card.
|
3117 |
|
|
|
3118 |
|
|
Intel EtherExpress/Pro 100B support'
|
3119 |
|
|
CONFIG_EEXPRESS_PRO100B
|
3120 |
|
|
If you have an Intel EtherExpress Pro 100 10/100Mbps PCI Ethernet
|
3121 |
|
|
card, answer yes. As of kernel release 2.0.31 this driver was
|
3122 |
|
|
still experimental.
|
3123 |
|
|
|
3124 |
|
|
EtherExpressPro support
|
3125 |
|
|
CONFIG_EEXPRESS_PRO
|
3126 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3127 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3128 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3129 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3130 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3131 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3132 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3133 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3134 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3135 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3136 |
|
|
|
3137 |
|
|
EtherExpress support
|
3138 |
|
|
CONFIG_EEXPRESS
|
3139 |
|
|
If you have an EtherExpress16 network (Ethernet) card, say Y and
|
3140 |
|
|
read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3141 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that the Intel
|
3142 |
|
|
EtherExpress16 card used to be regarded as a very poor choice
|
3143 |
|
|
because the driver was very unreliable. We now have a new driver
|
3144 |
|
|
that should do better. If you want to compile this driver as a
|
3145 |
|
|
module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3146 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
3147 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3148 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
3149 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3150 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3151 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3152 |
|
|
|
3153 |
|
|
NI5210 support
|
3154 |
|
|
CONFIG_NI52
|
3155 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3156 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3157 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan to use more than
|
3158 |
|
|
one network card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO,
|
3159 |
|
|
available from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3160 |
|
|
|
3161 |
|
|
NI6510 support
|
3162 |
|
|
CONFIG_NI65
|
3163 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3164 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3165 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan to use more than
|
3166 |
|
|
one network card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO,
|
3167 |
|
|
available from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3168 |
|
|
|
3169 |
|
|
Ottawa PI and PI/2 support
|
3170 |
|
|
CONFIG_PI
|
3171 |
|
|
This is a driver for the Ottawa Amateur Radio Club PI and PI2 cards,
|
3172 |
|
|
which are commonly used to send internet traffic over amateur radio.
|
3173 |
|
|
More information about these cards is on the WWW at
|
3174 |
|
|
http://hydra.carleton.ca/info/pi2.html (To browse the WWW, you need
|
3175 |
|
|
to have access to a machine on the Internet that has one of the
|
3176 |
|
|
programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). If you have one of these cards,
|
3177 |
|
|
you can say Y here and should read the HAM-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
3178 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Also,
|
3179 |
|
|
you should have said Y to "AX.25 support" above, because AX.25 is
|
3180 |
|
|
the protocol used for digital traffic over radio links.
|
3181 |
|
|
|
3182 |
|
|
Gracilis PackeTwin support
|
3183 |
|
|
CONFIG_PT
|
3184 |
|
|
This card is similar to the PI card (mentioned above). It is used
|
3185 |
|
|
mainly by amateur radio operators for packet radio. You should have
|
3186 |
|
|
already said Y to "AX.25 support" as this card uses that protocol.
|
3187 |
|
|
More information about this driver can be found in the file
|
3188 |
|
|
drivers/net/README.pt. NOTE: The card is capable of DMA and full
|
3189 |
|
|
duplex but neither of these have been coded in the driver as yet.
|
3190 |
|
|
|
3191 |
|
|
AT&T WaveLAN & DEC RoamAbout DS support
|
3192 |
|
|
CONFIG_WAVELAN
|
3193 |
|
|
The Lucent Wavelan (formerly NCR and AT&T ; or DEC RoamAbout DS)
|
3194 |
|
|
is a Radio LAN (wireless Ethernet-like) at 900 MHz and 2.4 GHz.
|
3195 |
|
|
This driver support the ISA version of the Wavelan. A driver for
|
3196 |
|
|
the pcmcia hardware is available in David Hinds's pcmcia package.
|
3197 |
|
|
This driver is fairly stable and may be compiled as a module
|
3198 |
|
|
(wavelan.o). It implements many nice feature and the Wireless
|
3199 |
|
|
Extensions (you must get the Wireless tools from the net).
|
3200 |
|
|
For documentation, refer to:
|
3201 |
|
|
o the wavelan man page, wireless tools man pages
|
3202 |
|
|
o wavelan.p.h and the source code
|
3203 |
|
|
o Ethernet-HOWTO, Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, Module-HOWTO
|
3204 |
|
|
o More documentation to come when I will have the time :-)
|
3205 |
|
|
|
3206 |
|
|
HP PCLAN+ (27247B and 27252A) support
|
3207 |
|
|
CONFIG_HPLAN_PLUS
|
3208 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3209 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3210 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3211 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3212 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3213 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3214 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3215 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3216 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3217 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3218 |
|
|
|
3219 |
|
|
HP PCLAN (27245 and other 27xxx series) support
|
3220 |
|
|
CONFIG_HPLAN
|
3221 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3222 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3223 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3224 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3225 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3226 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3227 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3228 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3229 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3230 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3231 |
|
|
|
3232 |
|
|
HP 10/100VG PCLAN (ISA, EISA, PCI) support
|
3233 |
|
|
CONFIG_HP100
|
3234 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3235 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3236 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
3237 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3238 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
3239 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3240 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
3241 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3242 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3243 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3244 |
|
|
|
3245 |
|
|
NE2000/NE1000 support
|
3246 |
|
|
CONFIG_NE2000
|
3247 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3248 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3249 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3250 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3251 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3252 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3253 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3254 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3255 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3256 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3257 |
|
|
|
3258 |
|
|
SK_G16 support
|
3259 |
|
|
CONFIG_SK_G16
|
3260 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3261 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3262 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you plan to use more than
|
3263 |
|
|
one network card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO,
|
3264 |
|
|
available from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3265 |
|
|
|
3266 |
|
|
EISA, VLB, PCI and on board controllers
|
3267 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_EISA
|
3268 |
|
|
This is another class of network cards which attach directly to the
|
3269 |
|
|
bus. If you have one of those, say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO,
|
3270 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:
|
3271 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO; if you are unsure, say Y.
|
3272 |
|
|
Note that the answer to this question doesn't directly affect the
|
3273 |
|
|
kernel: saying N will just cause this configure script to skip all
|
3274 |
|
|
the questions about this class of network cards. If you say Y, you
|
3275 |
|
|
will be asked for your specific card in the following questions.
|
3276 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3277 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3278 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3279 |
|
|
|
3280 |
|
|
Ansel Communications EISA 3200 support
|
3281 |
|
|
CONFIG_AC3200
|
3282 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3283 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3284 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3285 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3286 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3287 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3288 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3289 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3290 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3291 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3292 |
|
|
|
3293 |
|
|
Apricot Xen-II on board Ethernet
|
3294 |
|
|
CONFIG_APRICOT
|
3295 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) controller of this type, say Y and
|
3296 |
|
|
read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3297 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
3298 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3299 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
3300 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3301 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt. If you plan to use more
|
3302 |
|
|
than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3303 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3304 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3305 |
|
|
|
3306 |
|
|
DE425, DE434, DE435 support
|
3307 |
|
|
CONFIG_DE4X5
|
3308 |
|
|
This is support for the DIGITAL series of PCI/EISA Ethernet
|
3309 |
|
|
cards. These include the DE425, DE434, DE435, DE450 and DE500
|
3310 |
|
|
models. If you have a network card of this type, say Y and read
|
3311 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3312 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. More specific information is
|
3313 |
|
|
contained in drivers/net/README.de4x5. This driver is also available
|
3314 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3315 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3316 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3317 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3318 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3319 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3320 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3321 |
|
|
|
3322 |
|
|
DECchip Tulip (dc21x4x) PCI support
|
3323 |
|
|
CONFIG_DEC_ELCP
|
3324 |
|
|
This driver is developed for the SMC EtherPower series Ethernet
|
3325 |
|
|
cards and also works with cards based on the DECchip
|
3326 |
|
|
21040/21041/21140 (Tulip series) chips. (If your card is NOT SMC
|
3327 |
|
|
EtherPower 10/100 PCI (smc9332dst), you can also try the driver from
|
3328 |
|
|
"DE425, DE434, DE435 support", above.) However, most people with a
|
3329 |
|
|
network card of this type will say Y here. Do read the
|
3330 |
|
|
Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3331 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. More specific information is
|
3332 |
|
|
contained in Documentation/networking/tulip.txt. This driver is also
|
3333 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
3334 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
3335 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as
|
3336 |
|
|
well as Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3337 |
|
|
|
3338 |
|
|
Digi Intl. RightSwitch support
|
3339 |
|
|
CONFIG_DGRS
|
3340 |
|
|
This is support for the Digi International RightSwitch series of
|
3341 |
|
|
PCI/EISA Ethernet switch cards. These include the SE-4 and the SE-6
|
3342 |
|
|
models. If you have a network card of this type, say Y and read
|
3343 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3344 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. More specific information is
|
3345 |
|
|
contained in drivers/net/README.dgrs. This driver is also available
|
3346 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3347 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3348 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3349 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3350 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3351 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3352 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3353 |
|
|
|
3354 |
|
|
ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 support
|
3355 |
|
|
CONFIG_ETH16I
|
3356 |
|
|
If you have a network (Ethernet) card of this type, say Y and read
|
3357 |
|
|
the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3358 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. This driver is also available
|
3359 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3360 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a
|
3361 |
|
|
module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt as well as
|
3362 |
|
|
Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt.
|
3363 |
|
|
If you plan to use more than one network card under Linux,
|
3364 |
|
|
read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3365 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3366 |
|
|
|
3367 |
|
|
TI ThunderLAN support
|
3368 |
|
|
CONFIG_TLAN
|
3369 |
|
|
If you have a TLAN based network card which is supported by this
|
3370 |
|
|
driver, say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO. Devices currently
|
3371 |
|
|
supported are the Compaq Netelligent 10, Netelligent 10/100, and
|
3372 |
|
|
Internal NetFlex 3. This driver is also available as a module.
|
3373 |
|
|
Please email feedback to james.banks@caldera.com.
|
3374 |
|
|
|
3375 |
|
|
VIA Rhine support
|
3376 |
|
|
CONFIG_VIA_RHINE
|
3377 |
|
|
If you have a VIA "rhine" based network card (Rhine-I (3043) or
|
3378 |
|
|
Rhine-2 (VT86c100A)), say Y here. To build this driver as a module
|
3379 |
|
|
say M.
|
3380 |
|
|
|
3381 |
|
|
Zenith Z-Note support
|
3382 |
|
|
CONFIG_ZNET
|
3383 |
|
|
The Zenith Z-Note notebook computer has a built-in network
|
3384 |
|
|
(Ethernet) card, and this is the Linux driver for it. Note that the
|
3385 |
|
|
IBM Thinkpad 300 is compatible with the Z-Note and is also supported
|
3386 |
|
|
by this driver. Read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
3387 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
3388 |
|
|
|
3389 |
|
|
Pocket and portable adapters
|
3390 |
|
|
CONFIG_NET_POCKET
|
3391 |
|
|
Cute little network (Ethernet) devices which attach to the parallel
|
3392 |
|
|
port ("pocket adapters"), commonly used with laptops. If you have
|
3393 |
|
|
one of those, say Y and read the Ethernet-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
3394 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you
|
3395 |
|
|
want to plug a network card into the PCMCIA slot of your laptop
|
3396 |
|
|
instead (PCMCIA is the standard for credit card size extension cards
|
3397 |
|
|
used by all modern laptops), look in
|
3398 |
|
|
cb-iris.stanford.edu:/pub/pcmcia and say N here. Note that the
|
3399 |
|
|
answer to this question doesn't directly affect the kernel: saying N
|
3400 |
|
|
will just cause this configure script to skip all the questions
|
3401 |
|
|
about this class of network devices. If you say Y, you will be
|
3402 |
|
|
asked for your specific device in the following questions. If you
|
3403 |
|
|
plan to use more than one network device under Linux, read the
|
3404 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3405 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. If you intend to use an
|
3406 |
|
|
adapter attaching to the parallel port as well as a parallel
|
3407 |
|
|
printer, you should compile both drivers as modules (if possible).
|
3408 |
|
|
|
3409 |
|
|
AT-LAN-TEC/RealTek pocket adapter support
|
3410 |
|
|
CONFIG_ATP
|
3411 |
|
|
This is a network (Ethernet) device which attaches to your parallel
|
3412 |
|
|
port. Read drivers/net/atp.c as well as the Ethernet-HOWTO,
|
3413 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
3414 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO if you want to use this. If
|
3415 |
|
|
you plan to use more than one network card under Linux, read the
|
3416 |
|
|
Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available from
|
3417 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini. If you intend to use
|
3418 |
|
|
this driver, you should have said N to the Parallel Printer support,
|
3419 |
|
|
because the two drivers don't like each other.
|
3420 |
|
|
|
3421 |
|
|
D-Link DE600 pocket adapter support
|
3422 |
|
|
CONFIG_DE600
|
3423 |
|
|
This is a network (Ethernet) device which attaches to your parallel
|
3424 |
|
|
port. Read drivers/net/README.DLINK as well as the Ethernet-HOWTO,
|
3425 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
3426 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO if you want to use this. If
|
3427 |
|
|
you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted
|
3428 |
|
|
in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M
|
3429 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt. If you intend to use this
|
3430 |
|
|
pocket adapter as well as a parallel printer, you should compile
|
3431 |
|
|
both drivers as modules. If you plan to use more than one network
|
3432 |
|
|
card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available
|
3433 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3434 |
|
|
|
3435 |
|
|
D-Link DE620 pocket adapter support
|
3436 |
|
|
CONFIG_DE620
|
3437 |
|
|
This is a network (Ethernet) device which attaches to your parallel
|
3438 |
|
|
port. Read drivers/net/README.DLINK as well as the Ethernet-HOWTO,
|
3439 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
3440 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO if you want to use this. If
|
3441 |
|
|
you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted
|
3442 |
|
|
in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M
|
3443 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt. If you intend to use this
|
3444 |
|
|
pocket adapter as well as a parallel printer, you should compile
|
3445 |
|
|
both drivers as modules. If you plan to use more than one network
|
3446 |
|
|
card under Linux, read the Multiple-Ethernet-mini-HOWTO, available
|
3447 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO/mini.
|
3448 |
|
|
|
3449 |
|
|
Token Ring driver support
|
3450 |
|
|
CONFIG_TR
|
3451 |
|
|
Token Ring is IBM's way of communication on a local network; the
|
3452 |
|
|
rest of the world uses Ethernet. If you are connected to a token
|
3453 |
|
|
ring network and want to use your Token Ring card under Linux,
|
3454 |
|
|
say Y. Most people can say N here.
|
3455 |
|
|
|
3456 |
|
|
IBM Tropic chipset based adapter support
|
3457 |
|
|
CONFIG_IBMTR
|
3458 |
|
|
This is support for all IBM Token Ring cards that don't use DMA. If
|
3459 |
|
|
you have such a beast, say Y, otherwise N. Warning: this driver will
|
3460 |
|
|
almost definitely fail if more than one active Token Ring card is
|
3461 |
|
|
present. This driver is also available as a module ( = code which
|
3462 |
|
|
can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
3463 |
|
|
want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
3464 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
3465 |
|
|
|
3466 |
|
|
Support non-SCSI/IDE/ATAPI drives
|
3467 |
|
|
CONFIG_CD_NO_IDESCSI
|
3468 |
|
|
If you have a CDROM drive that is neither SCSI nor IDE/ATAPI, say Y
|
3469 |
|
|
here, otherwise N. Read the CDROM-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
3470 |
|
|
anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. Note that the
|
3471 |
|
|
answer to this question doesn't directly affect the kernel: saying N
|
3472 |
|
|
will just cause this configure script to skip all the questions
|
3473 |
|
|
about these CDROM drives. If you are unsure what you have, say Y and
|
3474 |
|
|
find out whether you have one of the following drives.
|
3475 |
|
|
For each of these drivers, a file Documentation/cdrom/
|
3476 |
|
|
exists. Especially in cases where you do not know exactly which kind
|
3477 |
|
|
of drive you have you should read there.
|
3478 |
|
|
Most of these drivers use a file include/linux/.h where
|
3479 |
|
|
you can define your interface parameters and switch some internal
|
3480 |
|
|
goodies.
|
3481 |
|
|
All these CDROM drivers are also usable as a module ( = code which
|
3482 |
|
|
can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
3483 |
|
|
want). If you want to compile them as module, say M instead of Y
|
3484 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
3485 |
|
|
If you want to use any of these CDROM drivers, you also have to say
|
3486 |
|
|
Y to "ISO9660 cdrom filesystem support" below (this answer will get
|
3487 |
|
|
"defaulted" for you if you enable any of the Linux CDROM drivers).
|
3488 |
|
|
|
3489 |
|
|
Sony CDU31A/CDU33A CDROM support
|
3490 |
|
|
CONFIG_CDU31A
|
3491 |
|
|
These CDROM drives have a spring-pop-out caddyless drawer, and a
|
3492 |
|
|
rectangular green LED centered beneath it. NOTE: these CDROM drives
|
3493 |
|
|
will not be auto detected by the kernel at boot time; you have to
|
3494 |
|
|
provide the interface address as an option to the kernel at boot
|
3495 |
|
|
time as described in Documentation/cdrom/cdu31a or fill in your
|
3496 |
|
|
parameters into linux/drivers/cdrom/cdu31a.c. See the documentation
|
3497 |
|
|
of your boot loader (lilo or loadlin) about how to pass options to
|
3498 |
|
|
the kernel. The lilo procedure is also explained in the SCSI-HOWTO.
|
3499 |
|
|
|
3500 |
|
|
Standard Mitsumi [no XA/Multisession] CDROM support
|
3501 |
|
|
CONFIG_MCD
|
3502 |
|
|
This is the older of the two drivers for the older Mitsumi models
|
3503 |
|
|
LU-005, FX-001 and FX-001D. This is not the right driver for
|
3504 |
|
|
the FX-001DE and the triple or quad speed models (all these are
|
3505 |
|
|
IDE/ATAPI models).
|
3506 |
|
|
With the old LU-005 model, the whole drive chassis slides out for
|
3507 |
|
|
cd insertion. The FX-xxx models use a motorized tray type mechanism.
|
3508 |
|
|
Note that this driver does not support XA or MultiSession CDs
|
3509 |
|
|
(PhotoCDs). There is a new driver (next question) which can do
|
3510 |
|
|
this. If you want that one, say N here.
|
3511 |
|
|
If the driver doesn't work out of the box, you might want to have
|
3512 |
|
|
a look at linux/include/linux/mcd.h.
|
3513 |
|
|
|
3514 |
|
|
Mitsumi [XA/MultiSession] support
|
3515 |
|
|
CONFIG_MCDX
|
3516 |
|
|
Use this driver if you want to be able to read XA or MultiSession
|
3517 |
|
|
CDs (PhotoCDs) as well as ordinary CDs with your Mitsumi LU-005,
|
3518 |
|
|
FX-001 or FX-001D CDROM drive. In addition, this driver uses much
|
3519 |
|
|
less kernel memory than the old one, if that is a concern. This
|
3520 |
|
|
driver is able to support more than one drive, but each drive needs
|
3521 |
|
|
a separate interface card. Check out Documentation/cdrom/mcdx.
|
3522 |
|
|
|
3523 |
|
|
Matsushita/Panasonic/Creative, Longshine, TEAC CDROM support
|
3524 |
|
|
CONFIG_SBPCD
|
3525 |
|
|
This driver supports most of the drives which use the Panasonic or
|
3526 |
|
|
SoundBlaster interface.
|
3527 |
|
|
The Matsushita CR-521, CR-522, CR-523, CR-562, CR-563 drives
|
3528 |
|
|
(sometimes labeled "Creative"), the CreativeLabs CD200, the
|
3529 |
|
|
Longshine LCS-7260, the "IBM External ISA CDROM" (in fact a CR-56x
|
3530 |
|
|
model), the TEAC CD-55A fall under this category. Some other
|
3531 |
|
|
"electrically compatible" drives (Vertos, Genoa, some Funai models)
|
3532 |
|
|
are currently not supported; for the Sanyo H94A drive currently a
|
3533 |
|
|
separate driver (asked later) is responsible. Most drives have a
|
3534 |
|
|
uniquely shaped faceplate, with a caddyless motorized drawer, but
|
3535 |
|
|
without external brand markings. The older CR-52x drives have a
|
3536 |
|
|
caddy and manual loading/eject, but still no external markings. The
|
3537 |
|
|
driver is able to do an extended auto-probing for interface
|
3538 |
|
|
addresses and drive types; this can help to find facts in cases you
|
3539 |
|
|
are not sure, but can consume some time during the boot process if
|
3540 |
|
|
none of the supported drives gets found.
|
3541 |
|
|
Once your drive got found, you should enter the reported parameters
|
3542 |
|
|
into linux/include/linux/sbpcd.h and set "DISTRIBUTION 0" there.
|
3543 |
|
|
This driver can support up to four CDROM interface cards, and each
|
3544 |
|
|
card can support up to four CDROM drives; if you say Y here, you
|
3545 |
|
|
will be asked how many controllers you have. If compiled as a
|
3546 |
|
|
module, only one interface card (but with up to four drives) is
|
3547 |
|
|
usable.
|
3548 |
|
|
|
3549 |
|
|
Matsushita/Panasonic, ... second CDROM controller support
|
3550 |
|
|
CONFIG_SBPCD2
|
3551 |
|
|
Say Y here only if you have two CDROM controller boards of this type
|
3552 |
|
|
(usually only if you have more than four drives). You should enter
|
3553 |
|
|
the parameters for the second, third and fourth interface card into
|
3554 |
|
|
linux/include/linux/sbpcd.h before compiling the new kernel.
|
3555 |
|
|
|
3556 |
|
|
Aztech/Orchid/Okano/Wearnes/TXC/CyDROM CDROM support
|
3557 |
|
|
CONFIG_AZTCD
|
3558 |
|
|
This is your driver if you have an Aztech CDA268-01A, Orchid
|
3559 |
|
|
CD-3110, Okano or Wearnes CDD110, Conrad TXC, or CyCDROM CR520 or
|
3560 |
|
|
CR540 CDROM drive. This driver -- just like all these CDROM drivers
|
3561 |
|
|
-- is NOT for CDROM drives with IDE/ATAPI interface, such as Aztech
|
3562 |
|
|
CDA269-031SE.
|
3563 |
|
|
|
3564 |
|
|
Sony CDU535 CDROM support
|
3565 |
|
|
CONFIG_CDU535
|
3566 |
|
|
This is the driver for the older Sony CDU-535 and CDU-531 CDROM
|
3567 |
|
|
drives.
|
3568 |
|
|
|
3569 |
|
|
Goldstar R420 CDROM support
|
3570 |
|
|
CONFIG_GSCD
|
3571 |
|
|
If this is your CDROM drive, say Y here.
|
3572 |
|
|
As described in linux/Documentation/cdrom/gscd, you might have to
|
3573 |
|
|
change a setting in the file include/linux/gscd.h before compiling
|
3574 |
|
|
the kernel.
|
3575 |
|
|
|
3576 |
|
|
Philips/LMS CM206 CDROM support
|
3577 |
|
|
CONFIG_CM206
|
3578 |
|
|
If you have a Philips/LMS CDROM drive cm206 in combination with a
|
3579 |
|
|
cm260 host adapter card, say Y here.
|
3580 |
|
|
|
3581 |
|
|
Optics Storage DOLPHIN 8000AT CDROM support
|
3582 |
|
|
CONFIG_OPTCD
|
3583 |
|
|
This is the driver for the 'DOLPHIN' drive with a 34-pin Sony
|
3584 |
|
|
compatible interface. It also works with the Lasermate CR328A. If
|
3585 |
|
|
you have one of those, say Y. This driver does not work for the
|
3586 |
|
|
Optics Storage 8001 drive; use the IDE-ATAPI CDROM driver for that
|
3587 |
|
|
one.
|
3588 |
|
|
|
3589 |
|
|
Sanyo CDR-H94A CDROM support
|
3590 |
|
|
CONFIG_SJCD
|
3591 |
|
|
If this is your CDROM drive, say Y here. Command line option
|
3592 |
|
|
(or 'append=' option in /etc/lilo.conf) is:
|
3593 |
|
|
sjcd=
|
3594 |
|
|
Here 'port' is the base i/o address used by the drive. It defaults
|
3595 |
|
|
to port=0x340.
|
3596 |
|
|
|
3597 |
|
|
Soft configurable cdrom interface card support
|
3598 |
|
|
CONFIG_CDI_INIT
|
3599 |
|
|
If you want to include boot-time initialization of any cdrom
|
3600 |
|
|
interface card that is software configurable, say Y here.
|
3601 |
|
|
Currently only the ISP16/MAD16/Mozart cards are supported.
|
3602 |
|
|
|
3603 |
|
|
ISP16/MAD16/Mozart soft configurable cdrom interface support
|
3604 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISP16_CDI
|
3605 |
|
|
If you want any of these cdrom interface cards based on the
|
3606 |
|
|
OPTi 82C928 or 82C929 chips get detected and possibly configured
|
3607 |
|
|
at boot time, please say Y. Boot time command line options (or
|
3608 |
|
|
'append=' options in /etc/lilo.conf) are:
|
3609 |
|
|
isp16=,,,
|
3610 |
|
|
Here 'port','irq' and 'dma' are the base i/o address, IRQ number and
|
3611 |
|
|
DMA line assumed to be used by the attached cdrom
|
3612 |
|
|
drive. 'drive_type' is the type of cdrom drive or its emulation
|
3613 |
|
|
mode. Valid values for drive_type include: Sanyo, Panasonic (same as
|
3614 |
|
|
Sanyo), Sony and Mitsumi. Default values are: port=0x340, irq=0,
|
3615 |
|
|
dma=0, drive_type=Sanyo.
|
3616 |
|
|
The command line
|
3617 |
|
|
isp16=noisp16
|
3618 |
|
|
will skip detection and configuration after all.
|
3619 |
|
|
N.B. options are case sensitive.
|
3620 |
|
|
Read Documentation/cdrom/isp16 for details.
|
3621 |
|
|
|
3622 |
|
|
Quota support
|
3623 |
|
|
CONFIG_QUOTA
|
3624 |
|
|
If you say Y here, you will be able to set per user limits for disk
|
3625 |
|
|
usage (also called diskquotas). Currently, it works only for the
|
3626 |
|
|
ext2 filesystem. You need additional software in order to use quota
|
3627 |
|
|
support; check the file Documentation/Changes for that. Probably the
|
3628 |
|
|
quota support is only useful for multi user systems. If unsure,
|
3629 |
|
|
say N.
|
3630 |
|
|
|
3631 |
|
|
Mandatory lock support
|
3632 |
|
|
CONFIG_LOCK_MANDATORY
|
3633 |
|
|
File locking is a system designed to prevent that several processes
|
3634 |
|
|
write to the same file at the same time, causing data
|
3635 |
|
|
corruption. Mandatory file locking is more secure than the usual
|
3636 |
|
|
algorithm and is used by some Unix System 5 style database
|
3637 |
|
|
applications. For details, read Documentation/mandatory.txt. To use
|
3638 |
|
|
this option safely you must have newer NFS daemons, new samba, new
|
3639 |
|
|
netatalk, new mars-nwe and other file servers. At the time of
|
3640 |
|
|
writing none of these are available. So it's safest to say N here
|
3641 |
|
|
unless you really know that you need this feature.
|
3642 |
|
|
|
3643 |
|
|
Minix fs support
|
3644 |
|
|
CONFIG_MINIX_FS
|
3645 |
|
|
Minix is a simple operating system used in many classes about OS's.
|
3646 |
|
|
The minix filesystem ( = method to organize files on a hard disk
|
3647 |
|
|
partition or a floppy disk) was the original filesystem for Linux,
|
3648 |
|
|
has been superseded by the second extended filesystem ext2fs but is
|
3649 |
|
|
still used for root/boot and other floppies or ram disks since it is
|
3650 |
|
|
leaner. You don't want to use it on your hard disk because of
|
3651 |
|
|
certain built-in restrictions. This option will enlarge your kernel
|
3652 |
|
|
by about 25 kB. Everyone should say Y or M so that they are able to
|
3653 |
|
|
read this common floppy format. If you want to compile this as
|
3654 |
|
|
a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
3655 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
3656 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. Note that the filesystem of your root
|
3657 |
|
|
partition cannot be compiled as a module.
|
3658 |
|
|
|
3659 |
|
|
Extended fs support
|
3660 |
|
|
CONFIG_EXT_FS
|
3661 |
|
|
This is the old Linux filesystem ( = method to organize files on a
|
3662 |
|
|
hard disk partition or a floppy disk) and not in use anymore.
|
3663 |
|
|
It enlarges your kernel by about 25 kB. Let's all kill this beast.
|
3664 |
|
|
Say N.
|
3665 |
|
|
|
3666 |
|
|
Second extended fs support
|
3667 |
|
|
CONFIG_EXT2_FS
|
3668 |
|
|
This is the de facto standard Linux filesystem ( = method to
|
3669 |
|
|
organize files on a storage device) for hard disks. You want to
|
3670 |
|
|
say Y, unless you intend to use Linux exclusively from inside a DOS
|
3671 |
|
|
partition using the umsdos filesystem. The advantage of the latter
|
3672 |
|
|
is that you can get away without repartitioning your hard drive
|
3673 |
|
|
(which often implies backing everything up and restoring
|
3674 |
|
|
afterwards); the disadvantage is that Linux becomes susceptible to
|
3675 |
|
|
DOS viruses and that umsdos is somewhat slower than ext2fs. Even if
|
3676 |
|
|
you want to run Linux in this fashion, it might be a good idea to
|
3677 |
|
|
have ext2fs around: it enables you to read more floppy disks and
|
3678 |
|
|
facilitates the transition to a *real* Linux partition later.
|
3679 |
|
|
Another (rare) case which doesn't require ext2fs is a diskless Linux
|
3680 |
|
|
box which mounts all files over the network using NFS (in this case
|
3681 |
|
|
it's sufficient to enable NFS filesystem support below; if you are
|
3682 |
|
|
planning to do this, have a look at the netboot package in
|
3683 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/system/Linux-boot/, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
3684 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu, extract with "tar xzvf filename"). There is a
|
3685 |
|
|
short ext2fs-FAQ, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3686 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/faqs. This option will enlarge your
|
3687 |
|
|
kernel by about 41 kB. Default is Y.
|
3688 |
|
|
|
3689 |
|
|
xiafs filesystem support
|
3690 |
|
|
CONFIG_XIA_FS
|
3691 |
|
|
This is an old filesystem ( = method to organize files on a hard
|
3692 |
|
|
disk partition or a floppy disk) and not in use anymore. This option
|
3693 |
|
|
would enlarge your kernel by about 28 kB. Let's all kill this beast:
|
3694 |
|
|
say N. If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can
|
3695 |
|
|
be inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
3696 |
|
|
want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. Note that the
|
3697 |
|
|
filesystem of your root partition cannot be compiled as a module.
|
3698 |
|
|
|
3699 |
|
|
fat fs support
|
3700 |
|
|
CONFIG_FAT_FS
|
3701 |
|
|
If you want to use one of the FAT-based filesystems (the MS-DOS,
|
3702 |
|
|
VFAT (Windows'95) and UMSDOS filesystems), then you must include
|
3703 |
|
|
FAT support. This is not a filesystem in itself, but it provides
|
3704 |
|
|
the foundation for the other filesystems. This option will enlarge
|
3705 |
|
|
your kernel about 24 kB. If unsure, say Y. If you want to compile
|
3706 |
|
|
this as a module however ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
3707 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
3708 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. Note that if you compile the FAT
|
3709 |
|
|
support as a module, you cannot compile any of the FAT-based
|
3710 |
|
|
filesystems into the kernel -- they will have to be modules as well.
|
3711 |
|
|
The filesystem of your root partition cannot be a module.
|
3712 |
|
|
|
3713 |
|
|
msdos fs support
|
3714 |
|
|
CONFIG_MSDOS_FS
|
3715 |
|
|
This allows you to mount MSDOS partitions of your hard drive (unless
|
3716 |
|
|
they are compressed; to access compressed MSDOS partitions under
|
3717 |
|
|
Linux, you can either use the DOS emulator DOSEMU, described in the
|
3718 |
|
|
DOSEMU-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) at
|
3719 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO, or try dmsdosfs in
|
3720 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Filesystems/dosfs. If you intend
|
3721 |
|
|
to use dosemu with a non-compressed MSDOS partition, say Y here) and
|
3722 |
|
|
MSDOS floppies. This means that file access becomes transparent,
|
3723 |
|
|
i.e. the MSDOS files look and behave just like all other Unix files.
|
3724 |
|
|
Another way to read and write MSDOS floppies from within Linux (but
|
3725 |
|
|
not transparently) is with the mtools ("man mtools") program suite,
|
3726 |
|
|
which doesn't require the msdos filesystem support. If you want to
|
3727 |
|
|
use umsdos, the Unix-like filesystem on top of DOS, which allows you
|
3728 |
|
|
to run Linux from within a DOS partition without repartitioning,
|
3729 |
|
|
you'll have to say Y or M here. If your have Windows'95 or Windows
|
3730 |
|
|
NT installed on your MSDOS partitions, you should use the VFAT
|
3731 |
|
|
filesystem instead, or you will not be able to see the long
|
3732 |
|
|
filenames generated by Windows'95 / Windows NT. This option will
|
3733 |
|
|
enlarge your kernel by about 7 kB. If unsure, say Y. This will only
|
3734 |
|
|
work if you said Y to "fat fs support" as well. If you want to
|
3735 |
|
|
compile this as a module however ( = code which can be inserted in
|
3736 |
|
|
and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here
|
3737 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt. Note that the filesystem of your
|
3738 |
|
|
root partition cannot be a module.
|
3739 |
|
|
|
3740 |
|
|
vfat fs support
|
3741 |
|
|
CONFIG_VFAT_FS
|
3742 |
|
|
This allows you to mount MSDOS partitions of your hard drive. It
|
3743 |
|
|
will let you use filenames in a way compatible with the long
|
3744 |
|
|
filenames used by Windows'95 and Windows NT fat-based (not NTFS)
|
3745 |
|
|
partitions. It does not support Windows'95 compressed filesystems.
|
3746 |
|
|
You cannot use the VFAT filesystem for your root partition; use
|
3747 |
|
|
UMSDOS instead. This option enlarges your kernel by about 10 kB and
|
3748 |
|
|
it only works if you enabled the "fat fs support" above. Please read
|
3749 |
|
|
the file Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt for details.
|
3750 |
|
|
If unsure, say N. If you want to compile this as a module ( = code
|
3751 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
3752 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
3753 |
|
|
|
3754 |
|
|
umsdos: Unix like fs on top of std MSDOS fs
|
3755 |
|
|
CONFIG_UMSDOS_FS
|
3756 |
|
|
Say Y here if you want to run Linux from within an existing DOS
|
3757 |
|
|
partition of your hard drive. The advantage of this is that you can
|
3758 |
|
|
get away without repartitioning your hard drive (which often implies
|
3759 |
|
|
backing everything up and restoring afterwards) and hence you're
|
3760 |
|
|
able to quickly try out Linux or show it to your friends; the
|
3761 |
|
|
disadvantage is that Linux becomes susceptible to DOS viruses and
|
3762 |
|
|
that UMSDOS is somewhat slower than ext2fs. Another use of umsdos
|
3763 |
|
|
is to write files with long unix filenames to MSDOS floppies; it
|
3764 |
|
|
also allows unix style softlinks and owner/permissions of files on
|
3765 |
|
|
MSDOS floppies. You will need a program called umssync in order to
|
3766 |
|
|
make use of umsdos. Read Documentation/filesystems/umsdos.txt. This
|
3767 |
|
|
option enlarges your kernel by about 25 kB and it only works if you
|
3768 |
|
|
enabled both "fat fs support" and "msdos fs support" above. If
|
3769 |
|
|
unsure, say N. If you want to compile this as a module ( = code
|
3770 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
3771 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
3772 |
|
|
Note that the filesystem of your root partition cannot be a module.
|
3773 |
|
|
|
3774 |
|
|
nls: Native language codepages and Unicode support
|
3775 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS
|
3776 |
|
|
This is required by the FAT based filesystems and by the ISO9660
|
3777 |
|
|
filesystem with Joliet support. Joliet is a Microsoft extension
|
3778 |
|
|
for CDROMs that supports Unicode.
|
3779 |
|
|
This allows translation between different character sets. When
|
3780 |
|
|
dealing with the FAT based filesystems, there are two character
|
3781 |
|
|
sets that are important. The first is the codepage. Codepages are
|
3782 |
|
|
character sets that are used by DOS to allow filenames to have
|
3783 |
|
|
native language characters when character sets were limited to
|
3784 |
|
|
256 characters. The codepage is the character set that is used to
|
3785 |
|
|
store native language characters on disk.
|
3786 |
|
|
The two most common codepages are 437 in the United States and 850
|
3787 |
|
|
in much of Europe. The second important character set is the
|
3788 |
|
|
input/output character set. This is the character set that is
|
3789 |
|
|
displayed on the screen. In the United States, this will almost
|
3790 |
|
|
always be the ISO 8859-1 character set. This is the default. Linux
|
3791 |
|
|
will only do a translation of the FAT filenames, not the contents
|
3792 |
|
|
of the files.
|
3793 |
|
|
|
3794 |
|
|
nls iso8859-1
|
3795 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_1
|
3796 |
|
|
ISO8859-1 is the Latin 1 character set, and it covers most West
|
3797 |
|
|
European languages such as Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
|
3798 |
|
|
English, Faeroese, Finnish, French, German, Galician, Irish,
|
3799 |
|
|
Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, and
|
3800 |
|
|
Valencian.
|
3801 |
|
|
|
3802 |
|
|
nls iso8859-2
|
3803 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_2
|
3804 |
|
|
ISO8859-2 is the Latin 2 character set, and it works for most
|
3805 |
|
|
Latin-written Slavic and Central European languages: Czech, German,
|
3806 |
|
|
Hungarian, Polish, Rumanian, Croatian, Slovak, Slovene.
|
3807 |
|
|
|
3808 |
|
|
nls iso8859-3
|
3809 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_3
|
3810 |
|
|
ISO8859-3 is the Latin 3 character set, and it s popular with
|
3811 |
|
|
authors of Esperanto, Galician, Maltese, and Turkish.
|
3812 |
|
|
|
3813 |
|
|
nls iso8859-4
|
3814 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_4
|
3815 |
|
|
ISO8859-4 is the Latin 4 character set, and it introduces letters
|
3816 |
|
|
for Estonian, Latvian, and Lithuanian. It is an incomplete
|
3817 |
|
|
predecessor of Latin 6.
|
3818 |
|
|
|
3819 |
|
|
nls iso8859-5
|
3820 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_5
|
3821 |
|
|
ISO8859-5 is a Cyrillic character set, and you can type Bulgarian,
|
3822 |
|
|
Byelorussian, Macedonian, Russian, Serbian, and Ukrainian.
|
3823 |
|
|
Note that the charset KOI8-R is preferred in Russia.
|
3824 |
|
|
|
3825 |
|
|
nls iso8859-6
|
3826 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_6
|
3827 |
|
|
ISO8859-6 is the Arabic character set.
|
3828 |
|
|
|
3829 |
|
|
nls iso8859-7
|
3830 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_7
|
3831 |
|
|
ISO8859-7 is the Modern Greek character set.
|
3832 |
|
|
|
3833 |
|
|
nls iso8859-8
|
3834 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_8
|
3835 |
|
|
ISO8859-8 is the Hebrew character set.
|
3836 |
|
|
|
3837 |
|
|
nls iso8859-9
|
3838 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_9
|
3839 |
|
|
ISO8859-9 is the Latin 5 character set, and it replaces the rarely
|
3840 |
|
|
needed Icelandic letters in Latin 1 with the Turkish ones.
|
3841 |
|
|
Useful in Turkey.
|
3842 |
|
|
|
3843 |
|
|
nls iso8859-10
|
3844 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_ISO8859_10
|
3845 |
|
|
ISO8859-10 is the Latin 6 character set, and it adds the last
|
3846 |
|
|
Inuit (Greenlandic) and Sami (Lappish) letters that were missing
|
3847 |
|
|
in Latin 4 to cover the entire Nordic area.
|
3848 |
|
|
|
3849 |
|
|
nls koi8-r
|
3850 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_KOI8_R
|
3851 |
|
|
This is the preferred Russian character set.
|
3852 |
|
|
|
3853 |
|
|
nls codepage 437
|
3854 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_437
|
3855 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used in the United States and parts
|
3856 |
|
|
of Canada.
|
3857 |
|
|
|
3858 |
|
|
nls codepage 737
|
3859 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_737
|
3860 |
|
|
This is the codepage used by DOS for Greek.
|
3861 |
|
|
|
3862 |
|
|
nls codepage 775
|
3863 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_775
|
3864 |
|
|
This is the codepage used by DOS for the Baltic Rim Languages.
|
3865 |
|
|
|
3866 |
|
|
nls codepage 850
|
3867 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_850
|
3868 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used in much of Europe -- United
|
3869 |
|
|
Kingdom, Germany, Spain, Italy, and [add more countries here].
|
3870 |
|
|
It has some characters useful to many European languages that are
|
3871 |
|
|
not part of codepage 437.
|
3872 |
|
|
|
3873 |
|
|
nls codepage 852
|
3874 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_852
|
3875 |
|
|
This is the Latin 2 codepage used by DOS for much of Central and
|
3876 |
|
|
Eastern Europe. It has all the required characters for these
|
3877 |
|
|
languages: Albanian, Croatian, Czech, English, Finnish, Hungarian,
|
3878 |
|
|
Irish, German, Polish, Romanian, Serbian (Latin transcription),
|
3879 |
|
|
Slovak, Slovenian, and Sorbian.
|
3880 |
|
|
|
3881 |
|
|
nls codepage 855
|
3882 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_855
|
3883 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Cyrillic.
|
3884 |
|
|
|
3885 |
|
|
nls codepage 857
|
3886 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_857
|
3887 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Turkish.
|
3888 |
|
|
|
3889 |
|
|
nls codepage 860
|
3890 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_860
|
3891 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Portuguese.
|
3892 |
|
|
|
3893 |
|
|
nls codepage 861
|
3894 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_861
|
3895 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Icelandic.
|
3896 |
|
|
|
3897 |
|
|
nls codepage 862
|
3898 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_862
|
3899 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Hebrew.
|
3900 |
|
|
|
3901 |
|
|
nls codepage 863
|
3902 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_863
|
3903 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Canadian French.
|
3904 |
|
|
|
3905 |
|
|
nls codepage 864
|
3906 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_864
|
3907 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Arabic.
|
3908 |
|
|
|
3909 |
|
|
nls codepage 865
|
3910 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_865
|
3911 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used in the Nordic European
|
3912 |
|
|
countries.
|
3913 |
|
|
|
3914 |
|
|
nls codepage 866
|
3915 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_866
|
3916 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Cyrillic/Russian.
|
3917 |
|
|
|
3918 |
|
|
nls codepage 869
|
3919 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_869
|
3920 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Greek.
|
3921 |
|
|
|
3922 |
|
|
nls codepage 874
|
3923 |
|
|
CONFIG_NLS_CODEPAGE_874
|
3924 |
|
|
This is the DOS codepage that is used for Thai.
|
3925 |
|
|
|
3926 |
|
|
/proc filesystem support
|
3927 |
|
|
CONFIG_PROC_FS
|
3928 |
|
|
This is a virtual filesystem providing information about the status
|
3929 |
|
|
of the system. "Virtual" means that it doesn't take up any space on
|
3930 |
|
|
your hard disk: the files are created on the fly when you access
|
3931 |
|
|
them. Also, you cannot read the files with less: you need to use
|
3932 |
|
|
more or cat. The filesystem is explained in the Kernel Hacker's
|
3933 |
|
|
Guide, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3934 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/LDP and also on the proc(8) manpage
|
3935 |
|
|
("man 8 proc"). This option will enlarge your kernel by about 18
|
3936 |
|
|
kB. It's totally cool; for example, "cat /proc/interrupts" gives
|
3937 |
|
|
information about what the different IRQs are used for at the moment
|
3938 |
|
|
(there is a small number of Interrupt ReQuest lines in your computer
|
3939 |
|
|
that are used by the periphery to gain the CPU's attention -- often
|
3940 |
|
|
a source of trouble if two devices are mistakenly configured to use
|
3941 |
|
|
the same IRQ). Several programs depend on this, so everyone should
|
3942 |
|
|
say Y here.
|
3943 |
|
|
|
3944 |
|
|
NFS filesystem support
|
3945 |
|
|
CONFIG_NFS_FS
|
3946 |
|
|
If you are connected to some other (usually local) Unix computer
|
3947 |
|
|
(using SLIP, PLIP, PPP or Ethernet) and want to mount files
|
3948 |
|
|
residing on that computer (the NFS server) using the Network
|
3949 |
|
|
File Sharing protocol, say Y. "Mounting files" means that the client
|
3950 |
|
|
can access the files with usual UNIX commands as if they were
|
3951 |
|
|
sitting on the client's hard disk. For this to work, the server must
|
3952 |
|
|
run the programs nfsd and mountd (but does not need to have NFS
|
3953 |
|
|
filesystem support enabled). NFS is explained in the Network
|
3954 |
|
|
Administrator's Guide, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
3955 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/LDP, and on its man page: "man nfs".
|
3956 |
|
|
There is also a NFS-FAQ in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/faqs
|
3957 |
|
|
which presumes that you know the basics of NFS already. If you say Y
|
3958 |
|
|
here, you should have said Y to TCP/IP networking also. This option
|
3959 |
|
|
would enlarge your kernel by about 27 kB. This filesystem is also
|
3960 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
3961 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
3962 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
3963 |
|
|
If you configure a diskless machine which will mount its root
|
3964 |
|
|
filesystem over NFS, you cannot compile this driver as a module.
|
3965 |
|
|
If you don't know what all this is about, say N.
|
3966 |
|
|
|
3967 |
|
|
Root file system on NFS
|
3968 |
|
|
CONFIG_ROOT_NFS
|
3969 |
|
|
If you want your Linux box to mount its whole root filesystem from
|
3970 |
|
|
some other computer over the net via NFS (presumably because your
|
3971 |
|
|
box doesn't have a hard disk), say Y. Read Documentation/nfsroot.txt
|
3972 |
|
|
for details. Most people say N here.
|
3973 |
|
|
|
3974 |
|
|
BOOTP support
|
3975 |
|
|
CONFIG_RNFS_BOOTP
|
3976 |
|
|
If you want your Linux box to mount its whole root filesystem from
|
3977 |
|
|
some other computer over the net via NFS and you want the IP address
|
3978 |
|
|
of your computer to be discovered automatically at boot time using
|
3979 |
|
|
the BOOTP protocol (a special protocol designed for doing this job),
|
3980 |
|
|
say Y here. In case the boot ROM of your network card was designed
|
3981 |
|
|
for booting Linux and does BOOTP itself, providing all necessary
|
3982 |
|
|
information on the kernel command line, you can say N here. If
|
3983 |
|
|
unsure, say Y. Note that in case you want to use BOOTP, a BOOTP
|
3984 |
|
|
server must be operating on your network. Read
|
3985 |
|
|
Documentation/nfsroot.txt for details.
|
3986 |
|
|
|
3987 |
|
|
RARP support
|
3988 |
|
|
CONFIG_RNFS_RARP
|
3989 |
|
|
If you want your Linux box to mount its whole root filesystem from
|
3990 |
|
|
some other computer over the net via NFS and you want the IP address
|
3991 |
|
|
of your computer to be discovered automatically at boot time using
|
3992 |
|
|
the RARP protocol (an older protocol which is being obsoleted by
|
3993 |
|
|
BOOTP), say Y here. Note that in case you want to use RARP, a RARP
|
3994 |
|
|
server must be operating on your network. Read
|
3995 |
|
|
Documentation/nfsroot.txt for details.
|
3996 |
|
|
|
3997 |
|
|
ISO9660 cdrom filesystem support
|
3998 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISO9660_FS
|
3999 |
|
|
This is the standard filesystem used on CDROMs. It was previously
|
4000 |
|
|
known as "High Sierra Filesystem" and is called "hsfs" on other Unix
|
4001 |
|
|
systems. The so-called Rock-Ridge extensions which allow for long
|
4002 |
|
|
Unix filenames are also supported by this driver. If you have a
|
4003 |
|
|
CDROM drive and want to do more with it than just listen to audio
|
4004 |
|
|
CDs and watch its LEDs, say Y (and read the CDROM-HOWTO, available
|
4005 |
|
|
via FTP (user: anonymous) from sunsite.unc.edu:
|
4006 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO), thereby enlarging your kernel by about
|
4007 |
|
|
27 kB; otherwise say N. If you want to compile this as a module
|
4008 |
|
|
( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the running
|
4009 |
|
|
kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4010 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4011 |
|
|
|
4012 |
|
|
OS/2 HPFS filesystem support (read only)
|
4013 |
|
|
CONFIG_HPFS_FS
|
4014 |
|
|
OS/2 is IBM's operating system for PC's, the same as Warp, and HPFS
|
4015 |
|
|
is the filesystem used for organizing files on OS/2 hard disk
|
4016 |
|
|
partitions. Say Y if you want to be able to read files from an OS/2
|
4017 |
|
|
HPFS partition of your hard drive. OS/2 floppies however are in
|
4018 |
|
|
regular MSDOS format, so you don't need this option in order to be
|
4019 |
|
|
able to read them. Read Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.txt. This
|
4020 |
|
|
filesystem is also available as a module ( = code which can be
|
4021 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you
|
4022 |
|
|
want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
4023 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If unsure, say N.
|
4024 |
|
|
|
4025 |
|
|
System V and Coherent filesystem support
|
4026 |
|
|
CONFIG_SYSV_FS
|
4027 |
|
|
SCO, Xenix and Coherent are commercial Unix systems for Intel
|
4028 |
|
|
machines. Enabling this option would allow you to read and write to
|
4029 |
|
|
and from their floppies and hard disk partitions. If you have a
|
4030 |
|
|
floppy or hard disk partition like that, it is probable that they
|
4031 |
|
|
contain binaries from those other Unix systems; in order to run
|
4032 |
|
|
these binaries, you will want to install iBCS2 (iBCS2 [Intel Binary
|
4033 |
|
|
Compatibility Standard] is a kernel module which lets you run SCO,
|
4034 |
|
|
Xenix, Wyse, Unix Ware, Dell Unix and System V programs under Linux
|
4035 |
|
|
and is often needed to run commercial software, most prominently
|
4036 |
|
|
WordPerfect. It's in tsx-11.mit.edu:/pub/linux/BETA). If you only
|
4037 |
|
|
intend to mount files from some other Unix over the network using
|
4038 |
|
|
NFS, you don't need the System V filesystem support (but you need
|
4039 |
|
|
NFS filesystem support obviously). Note that this option is
|
4040 |
|
|
generally not needed for floppies, since a good portable way to
|
4041 |
|
|
transport files and directories between unixes (and even other
|
4042 |
|
|
operating systems) is given by the tar program ("man tar"). Note
|
4043 |
|
|
also that this option has nothing whatsoever to do with the option
|
4044 |
|
|
"System V IPC". Read about the System V filesystem in
|
4045 |
|
|
Documentation/filesystems/sysv-fs.txt. This option will enlarge your
|
4046 |
|
|
kernel by about 34 kB. If you want to compile this as a module ( =
|
4047 |
|
|
code which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
4048 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4049 |
|
|
If you haven't heard about all of this before, it's safe to say N.
|
4050 |
|
|
|
4051 |
|
|
Kernel automounter support (experimental)
|
4052 |
|
|
CONFIG_AUTOFS_FS
|
4053 |
|
|
The automounter is a tool to automatically mount remote filesystems
|
4054 |
|
|
on demand. This implementation is partially kernel-based to reduce
|
4055 |
|
|
overhead in the already-mounted case; this is unlike the BSD
|
4056 |
|
|
automounter (amd), which is only in user space. To use the
|
4057 |
|
|
automounter you also need the user-space tools from
|
4058 |
|
|
ftp.kernel.org:/pub/linux/daemons/autofs. If you are not a part of
|
4059 |
|
|
a fairly large, distributed network, you probably do not need an
|
4060 |
|
|
automounter, and can say N here.
|
4061 |
|
|
|
4062 |
|
|
BSD UFS filesystem support (read only)
|
4063 |
|
|
CONFIG_UFS_FS
|
4064 |
|
|
BSD and derivate versions of Unix (such as SunOS, FreeBSD, NetBSD
|
4065 |
|
|
and NeXTstep) use a filesystem called UFS. Some System V Unixes can
|
4066 |
|
|
create and mount partitions and diskettes using this filesystem
|
4067 |
|
|
as well. Enabling this option allows you to mount these partitions
|
4068 |
|
|
and diskettes read-only. If you only intend to mount files from
|
4069 |
|
|
some other Unix over the network using NFS, you don't need the
|
4070 |
|
|
UFS filesystem support (but you need NFS filesystem support
|
4071 |
|
|
obviously). Note that this option is generally not needed for
|
4072 |
|
|
floppies, since a good portable way to transport files and
|
4073 |
|
|
directories between unixes (and even other operating systems)
|
4074 |
|
|
is given by the tar program ("man tar"). When accessing NeXTstep
|
4075 |
|
|
files, you may need to convert them from the NeXT character set
|
4076 |
|
|
to the Latin1 character set; use GNU recode for this purpose.
|
4077 |
|
|
Say Y to build UFS support into your kernel. If you want to compile
|
4078 |
|
|
this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from
|
4079 |
|
|
the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4080 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If you haven't heard about all of this
|
4081 |
|
|
before, it's safe to say N.
|
4082 |
|
|
|
4083 |
|
|
BSD disklabel (FreeBSD partition tables) support
|
4084 |
|
|
CONFIG_BSD_DISKLABEL
|
4085 |
|
|
FreeBSD uses its own partition scheme on your PC. It requires only
|
4086 |
|
|
one entry in the primary partition table of your disk and manages it
|
4087 |
|
|
similarly to DOS extended partitions, putting in its first sector a
|
4088 |
|
|
new partition table in disklabel format. Enabling this option allows
|
4089 |
|
|
you to read these disklabels and further mount FreeBSD partitions on
|
4090 |
|
|
your Linux box if you also have configured BSD ufs filesystem
|
4091 |
|
|
support. If you don't know what all this is about, say N.
|
4092 |
|
|
|
4093 |
|
|
SMD disklabel (Sun partition tables) support
|
4094 |
|
|
CONFIG_SMD_DISKLABEL
|
4095 |
|
|
Like most systems, SunOS uses its own partition table format,
|
4096 |
|
|
incompatible with all others. Enabling this option allows you to
|
4097 |
|
|
read these partition tables and further mount SunOS disks on your
|
4098 |
|
|
Linux box if you also have configured BSD ufs filesystem support.
|
4099 |
|
|
This is mainly used to carry data from a SPARC under SunOS to your
|
4100 |
|
|
Linux box via a removable medium like magneto-optical or ZIP drives.
|
4101 |
|
|
If you don't know what all this is about, say N.
|
4102 |
|
|
|
4103 |
|
|
SMB filesystem support (to mount WfW shares etc...)
|
4104 |
|
|
CONFIG_SMB_FS
|
4105 |
|
|
SMB (Server Message Buffer) is the protocol Windows for Workgroups
|
4106 |
|
|
(WfW), Windows NT and Lan Manager use to talk to each other over an
|
4107 |
|
|
Ethernet. Enabling this allows you to mount their filesystems and
|
4108 |
|
|
access them just like any other unix directory. For details, read
|
4109 |
|
|
Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt. Note: if you just want your
|
4110 |
|
|
box to act as an SMB *server* and make files and printing services
|
4111 |
|
|
available to Windows clients (which need to have a TCP/IP stack),
|
4112 |
|
|
you don't need to enable this filesystem support; you can use the
|
4113 |
|
|
program samba (available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
4114 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/system/Network/samba) for that. General
|
4115 |
|
|
information about how to connect Linux, Windows machines and Macs is
|
4116 |
|
|
on the WWW at http://eats.com/linux_mac_win.html (to browse the WWW,
|
4117 |
|
|
you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has one of
|
4118 |
|
|
the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic). If you want to compile the
|
4119 |
|
|
SMB support as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4120 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
4121 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. Most people say N, however.
|
4122 |
|
|
|
4123 |
|
|
SMB Win95 bug work-around
|
4124 |
|
|
CONFIG_SMB_WIN95
|
4125 |
|
|
If you want to connect to a share exported by Windows 95, you should
|
4126 |
|
|
say Y here. The Windows 95 server contains a bug that makes listing
|
4127 |
|
|
directories unreliable. This option slows down the listing of
|
4128 |
|
|
directories. This makes the Windows 95 server a bit more stable.
|
4129 |
|
|
|
4130 |
|
|
NCP filesystem support (to mount NetWare volumes)
|
4131 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCP_FS
|
4132 |
|
|
NCP (NetWare Core Protocol) is a protocol that runs over IPX and is
|
4133 |
|
|
used by Novell NetWare clients to talk to file servers. It is to IPX
|
4134 |
|
|
what NFS is to TCP/IP, if that helps. Saying Y here allows you to
|
4135 |
|
|
mount NetWare file server volumes and to access them just like any
|
4136 |
|
|
other Unix directory. For details, please read the file
|
4137 |
|
|
Documentation/filesystems/ncpfs.txt in the kernel source and the
|
4138 |
|
|
IPX-HOWTO on ftp://sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/howto.
|
4139 |
|
|
You do not have to say Y here if you want your Linux box to act as a
|
4140 |
|
|
file *server* for Novell NetWare clients.
|
4141 |
|
|
General information about how to connect Linux, Windows machines and
|
4142 |
|
|
Macs is on the WWW at http://www.eats.com/linux_mac_win.html (to
|
4143 |
|
|
browse the WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet
|
4144 |
|
|
that has a program like lynx or netscape).
|
4145 |
|
|
If you want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be
|
4146 |
|
|
inserted in and removed from the running kernel whenever you want),
|
4147 |
|
|
say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt. The module will be
|
4148 |
|
|
called ncpfs.o. Say N unless you are connected to a Novell network.
|
4149 |
|
|
|
4150 |
|
|
Packet signatures
|
4151 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_PACKET_SIGNING
|
4152 |
|
|
NCP allows packets to be signed for stronger security. If you want
|
4153 |
|
|
security, say Y. Normal users can leave it off. To be able to use
|
4154 |
|
|
packet signing you must use ncpfs > 2.0.12.
|
4155 |
|
|
|
4156 |
|
|
Proprietary file locking
|
4157 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_IOCTL_LOCKING
|
4158 |
|
|
Allows locking of records on remote volumes. Say N unless you have
|
4159 |
|
|
special applications which are able to utilize this locking scheme.
|
4160 |
|
|
|
4161 |
|
|
Clear remove/delete inhibit when needed
|
4162 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_STRONG
|
4163 |
|
|
Allows manipulation of files flagged as Delete or Rename Inhibit. To
|
4164 |
|
|
use this feature you must mount volumes with the ncpmount parameter
|
4165 |
|
|
"-s" (ncpfs-2.0.12 and newer). Say Y unless you are not mounting
|
4166 |
|
|
volumes with -f 444.
|
4167 |
|
|
|
4168 |
|
|
Use NFS namespace when available
|
4169 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_NFS_NS
|
4170 |
|
|
Allows you to utilize NFS namespace on NetWare servers. It brings
|
4171 |
|
|
you case sensitive filenames. Say Y. You can disable it at
|
4172 |
|
|
mount-time with the `-N nfs' parameter of ncpmount.
|
4173 |
|
|
|
4174 |
|
|
Use OS2/LONG namespace when available
|
4175 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_OS2_NS
|
4176 |
|
|
Allows you to utilize OS2/LONG namespace on NetWare servers.
|
4177 |
|
|
Filenames in this namespace are limited to 255 characters, they are
|
4178 |
|
|
case insensitive, and case in names is preserved. Say Y. You can
|
4179 |
|
|
disable it at mount time with the -N os2 parameter of ncpmount.
|
4180 |
|
|
|
4181 |
|
|
Allow mounting of volume subdirectories
|
4182 |
|
|
CONFIG_NCPFS_MOUNT_SUBDIR
|
4183 |
|
|
Allows you to mount not only whole servers or whole volumes, but
|
4184 |
|
|
also subdirectories from a volume. It can be used to reexport data
|
4185 |
|
|
and so on. There is no reason to say N, so Y is recommended unless
|
4186 |
|
|
you count every byte.
|
4187 |
|
|
To utilize this feature you must use ncpfs-2.0.12 or newer.
|
4188 |
|
|
|
4189 |
|
|
Amiga FFS filesystem support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
4190 |
|
|
CONFIG_AFFS_FS
|
4191 |
|
|
The Fast File System (FFS) is the common filesystem used on
|
4192 |
|
|
hard disks by Amiga (tm) Systems since AmigaOS Version 1.3 (34.20).
|
4193 |
|
|
It's also possible to mount diskfiles used by
|
4194 |
|
|
the Un*X Amiga Emulator by Bernd Schmidt
|
4195 |
|
|
(http://www-users.informatik.rwth-aachen.de/~crux/uae.html).
|
4196 |
|
|
If you want to do the latter, you will also need the loop device
|
4197 |
|
|
support. Say Y if you want to be able to read and write files from
|
4198 |
|
|
and to an Amiga FFS partition of your hard drive. Amiga floppies
|
4199 |
|
|
however cannot be read with this driver due to an incompatibility of
|
4200 |
|
|
the floppy controller used in an Amiga and the standard floppy
|
4201 |
|
|
controller in PCs and workstations. Read
|
4202 |
|
|
Documentation/filesystems/affs.txt. This filesystem is also
|
4203 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
4204 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
4205 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4206 |
|
|
If unsure, say N.
|
4207 |
|
|
|
4208 |
|
|
ROM filesystem support
|
4209 |
|
|
CONFIG_ROMFS_FS
|
4210 |
|
|
This is a very small read-only filesystem mainly intended for
|
4211 |
|
|
initial ram disks of installation disk, but it could be used for
|
4212 |
|
|
other read-only media as well. Read
|
4213 |
|
|
Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt for details. This filesystem is
|
4214 |
|
|
also available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4215 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want). The module is
|
4216 |
|
|
called romfs.o. If you want to compile it as a module, say M here
|
4217 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt. If you don't know whether you
|
4218 |
|
|
need it, then you don't need it: say N.
|
4219 |
|
|
|
4220 |
|
|
Standard/generic serial support
|
4221 |
|
|
CONFIG_SERIAL
|
4222 |
|
|
This selects whether you want to include the driver for the standard
|
4223 |
|
|
serial ports. People who might say N here are those that are
|
4224 |
|
|
setting up dedicated Ethernet WWW/FTP servers, or users that have
|
4225 |
|
|
one of the various bus mice instead of a serial mouse. (Note that
|
4226 |
|
|
the Cyclades and Stallion multi serial port drivers do not need this
|
4227 |
|
|
driver built in for them to work. They are completely independent of
|
4228 |
|
|
each other.) If you want to compile this driver as a module, say M
|
4229 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt. [WARNING: Do not compile
|
4230 |
|
|
this driver as a module if you are using non-standard serial ports,
|
4231 |
|
|
since the configuration information will be lost when kerneld
|
4232 |
|
|
automatically unloads the driver. This limitation may be lifted in
|
4233 |
|
|
the future.] Most people will say Y or M here, so that they can use
|
4234 |
|
|
serial mice, modems and similar devices connecting to the standard
|
4235 |
|
|
serial ports.
|
4236 |
|
|
|
4237 |
|
|
Digiboard PC/Xx Support
|
4238 |
|
|
CONFIG_DIGI
|
4239 |
|
|
This is a driver for the Digiboard PC/Xe, PC/Xi, and PC/Xeve cards
|
4240 |
|
|
that give you many serial ports. You would need something like this
|
4241 |
|
|
to connect more than two modems to your Linux box, for instance in
|
4242 |
|
|
order to become a BBS. If you have a card like that, say Y here and
|
4243 |
|
|
read the file Documentation/digiboard.txt.
|
4244 |
|
|
|
4245 |
|
|
SDL RISCom/8 card support
|
4246 |
|
|
CONFIG_RISCOM8
|
4247 |
|
|
This is a driver for the SDL Communications RISCom/8 multiport card,
|
4248 |
|
|
that give you many serial ports. You would need something like this
|
4249 |
|
|
to connect more than two modems to your Linux box, for instance in
|
4250 |
|
|
order to become a BBS. If you have a card like that, say Y here and
|
4251 |
|
|
read the file Documentation/riscom8.txt. Also it's possible to say
|
4252 |
|
|
M here and compile this driver as kernel loadable module.
|
4253 |
|
|
|
4254 |
|
|
Specialix IO8+ card support
|
4255 |
|
|
CONFIG_SPECIALIX
|
4256 |
|
|
This is a driver for the Specialix IO8+ multiport card (both the
|
4257 |
|
|
ISA and the PCI version), that gives you 8 serial ports. You would
|
4258 |
|
|
need a card like this to connect more than two modems to your linux
|
4259 |
|
|
box, for instance in order to become a BBS. If you have a card like
|
4260 |
|
|
that, say Y here and read the file Documentation/specialix.txt. Also
|
4261 |
|
|
it's possible to say M here and compile this driver as kernel
|
4262 |
|
|
loadable module.
|
4263 |
|
|
|
4264 |
|
|
Specialix DTR/RTS pin is RTS
|
4265 |
|
|
CONFIG_SPECIALIX_RTSCTS
|
4266 |
|
|
The Specialix card can only support either RTS or DTR. When this
|
4267 |
|
|
option is off, the driver will use the pin as "DTR" when the tty is
|
4268 |
|
|
in software handshake mode. When this option is on or hardware
|
4269 |
|
|
handshake is on, it will always be RTS. Read the file
|
4270 |
|
|
Documentation/specialix.txt for more information.
|
4271 |
|
|
|
4272 |
|
|
Cyclades async mux support
|
4273 |
|
|
CONFIG_CYCLADES
|
4274 |
|
|
This is a driver for a card that gives you many serial ports. You
|
4275 |
|
|
would need something like this to connect more than two modems to
|
4276 |
|
|
your Linux box, for instance in order to become a BBS. If you want
|
4277 |
|
|
to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4278 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
4279 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. If you haven't heard about it, it's
|
4280 |
|
|
safe to say N. (As of 1.3.9x kernels, this driver's minor numbers
|
4281 |
|
|
start at 0 instead of 32.)
|
4282 |
|
|
|
4283 |
|
|
Stallion multiport serial support
|
4284 |
|
|
CONFIG_STALDRV
|
4285 |
|
|
Stallion cards give you many serial ports. You would need something
|
4286 |
|
|
like this to connect more than two modems to your Linux box, for
|
4287 |
|
|
instance in order to become a BBS. If you say Y here, you will be
|
4288 |
|
|
asked for your specific card model in the next questions. Make sure
|
4289 |
|
|
to read drivers/char/README.stallion in this case. If you have never
|
4290 |
|
|
heard about all this, it's safe to say N.
|
4291 |
|
|
|
4292 |
|
|
Stallion EasyIO or EC8/32 support
|
4293 |
|
|
CONFIG_STALLION n
|
4294 |
|
|
If you have an EasyIO or EasyConnection 8/32 multiport Stallion
|
4295 |
|
|
card, then this is for you; say Y. Make sure to read
|
4296 |
|
|
drivers/char/README.stallion. If you want to compile this as a
|
4297 |
|
|
module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
4298 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4299 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4300 |
|
|
|
4301 |
|
|
Stallion EC8/64, ONboard, Brumby support
|
4302 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISTALLION
|
4303 |
|
|
If you have an EasyConnection 8/64, ONboard, Brumby or Stallion
|
4304 |
|
|
serial multiport card, say Y here. Make sure to read
|
4305 |
|
|
drivers/char/README.stallion. To compile it as a module ( = code
|
4306 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
4307 |
|
|
whenever you want), say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4308 |
|
|
|
4309 |
|
|
Parallel printer support
|
4310 |
|
|
CONFIG_PRINTER
|
4311 |
|
|
If you intend to attach a printer to the parallel port of your Linux
|
4312 |
|
|
box (as opposed to using a serial printer; if the connector at the
|
4313 |
|
|
printer has 9 or 25 holes ["female"], then it's serial), say Y. Also
|
4314 |
|
|
read the Printing-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
4315 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
4316 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
4317 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4318 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If you want to use both a parallel
|
4319 |
|
|
printer and PLIP, there are two cases: 1) If the printer and the
|
4320 |
|
|
PLIP cable are to use the same parallel port (presumably because you
|
4321 |
|
|
have just one), it is best to compile both drivers as modules and
|
4322 |
|
|
load and unload them as needed. 2) To use different parallel ports
|
4323 |
|
|
for the printer and the PLIP cable, you can say Y to this printer
|
4324 |
|
|
driver, specify the base address of the parallel port(s) to use for
|
4325 |
|
|
the printer(s) with the "lp" kernel command line option. (See the
|
4326 |
|
|
documentation of your boot loader (lilo or loadlin) about how to
|
4327 |
|
|
pass options to the kernel at boot time. The lilo procedure is also
|
4328 |
|
|
explained in the SCSI-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
4329 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.) The standard base addresses
|
4330 |
|
|
as well as the syntax of the "lp" command line option can be found
|
4331 |
|
|
in drivers/char/lp.c. You can then say Y to the PLIP driver or,
|
4332 |
|
|
preferably, M in which case Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt
|
4333 |
|
|
tells you how to specify the port and IRQ to be used by PLIP at
|
4334 |
|
|
module load time.
|
4335 |
|
|
|
4336 |
|
|
|
4337 |
|
|
Mouse Support (not serial mice)
|
4338 |
|
|
CONFIG_MOUSE
|
4339 |
|
|
This is for machines with a bus mouse or a PS/2 mouse as opposed to
|
4340 |
|
|
a serial mouse. Most people have a regular serial MouseSystem or
|
4341 |
|
|
Microsoft mouse (made by Logitech) that plugs into a COM port
|
4342 |
|
|
(rectangular with 9 or 25 pins). These people say N here. If you
|
4343 |
|
|
have something else, read the Busmouse-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
4344 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO and say Y
|
4345 |
|
|
here. If you have a laptop, you either have to check the
|
4346 |
|
|
documentation or experiment a bit to find out whether the trackball
|
4347 |
|
|
is a serial mouse or not; it's best to say Y here for you. Note that
|
4348 |
|
|
the answer to this question won't directly affect the kernel:
|
4349 |
|
|
saying N will just cause this configure script to skip all the
|
4350 |
|
|
questions about non-serial mice. If unsure, say Y.
|
4351 |
|
|
|
4352 |
|
|
Logitech busmouse support
|
4353 |
|
|
CONFIG_BUSMOUSE
|
4354 |
|
|
Logitech mouse connected to a proprietary interface card. It's
|
4355 |
|
|
generally a round connector with 9 pins. Note that the newer mice
|
4356 |
|
|
made by Logitech don't use the Logitech protocol anymore; for those,
|
4357 |
|
|
you don't need this option. You want to read the Busmouse-HOWTO,
|
4358 |
|
|
available via FTP (user: anonymous) in
|
4359 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to compile this
|
4360 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
4361 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4362 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If you are unsure, say N and read the
|
4363 |
|
|
HOWTO nevertheless: it will tell you what you have.
|
4364 |
|
|
|
4365 |
|
|
PS/2 mouse (aka "auxiliary device") support
|
4366 |
|
|
CONFIG_PSMOUSE
|
4367 |
|
|
The PS/2 mouse connects to a special mouse port that looks much like
|
4368 |
|
|
the keyboard port (small circular connector with 6 pins). This way,
|
4369 |
|
|
the mouse does not use any serial ports. This port can also be used
|
4370 |
|
|
for other input devices like light pens, tablets, keypads. Compaq,
|
4371 |
|
|
AST and IBM all use this as their mouse port on currently shipping
|
4372 |
|
|
machines. The trackballs of some laptops are PS/2 mice also. In
|
4373 |
|
|
particular, the C&T 82C710 mouse on TI Travelmates is a PS/2
|
4374 |
|
|
mouse. Although PS/2 mice are not technically bus mice, they are
|
4375 |
|
|
explained in detail in the Busmouse-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
4376 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to
|
4377 |
|
|
compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4378 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
4379 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. If you are unsure, say N and read
|
4380 |
|
|
the HOWTO nevertheless: it will tell you what you have.
|
4381 |
|
|
|
4382 |
|
|
C&T 82C710 mouse port support (as on TI Travelmate)
|
4383 |
|
|
CONFIG_82C710_MOUSE
|
4384 |
|
|
This is a certain kind of PS/2 mouse used on the TI Travelmate. If
|
4385 |
|
|
you are unsure, try first to say N here and come back if the mouse
|
4386 |
|
|
doesn't work. Read the Busmouse-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
4387 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO.
|
4388 |
|
|
|
4389 |
|
|
Microsoft busmouse support
|
4390 |
|
|
CONFIG_MS_BUSMOUSE
|
4391 |
|
|
These animals (also called Inport mice) are connected to an
|
4392 |
|
|
expansion board using a round connector with 9 pins. If this is what
|
4393 |
|
|
you have, say Y and read the Busmouse-HOWTO, available via FTP
|
4394 |
|
|
(user: anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you
|
4395 |
|
|
want to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in
|
4396 |
|
|
and removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here
|
4397 |
|
|
and read Documentation/modules.txt. If you are unsure, say N and
|
4398 |
|
|
read the HOWTO nevertheless: it will tell you what you have. Also be
|
4399 |
|
|
aware that several vendors talk about 'Microsoft busmouse' and
|
4400 |
|
|
actually mean PS/2 busmouse -- so count the pins on the connector.
|
4401 |
|
|
|
4402 |
|
|
ATIXL busmouse support
|
4403 |
|
|
CONFIG_ATIXL_BUSMOUSE
|
4404 |
|
|
This is a rare type of busmouse that is connected to the back of an
|
4405 |
|
|
ATI video card. Note that most ATI mice are actually Microsoft
|
4406 |
|
|
busmice. Read the Busmouse-HOWTO, available via FTP (user:
|
4407 |
|
|
anonymous) in sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. If you want to
|
4408 |
|
|
compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4409 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
4410 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt. If you are unsure, say N and read
|
4411 |
|
|
the HOWTO nevertheless: it will tell you what you have.
|
4412 |
|
|
|
4413 |
|
|
Support for user miscellaneous modules
|
4414 |
|
|
CONFIG_UMISC
|
4415 |
|
|
This option forces generic miscellaneous minor device support in the
|
4416 |
|
|
kernel, and allows later loading of user miscellaneous device
|
4417 |
|
|
modules, such as drivers for optic pens and touchscreens. Unless you
|
4418 |
|
|
need such specific modules, or are willing to write/test one, just
|
4419 |
|
|
say N.
|
4420 |
|
|
|
4421 |
|
|
QIC-02 tape support
|
4422 |
|
|
CONFIG_QIC02_TAPE
|
4423 |
|
|
If you have a non-SCSI tape drive like that, say Y.
|
4424 |
|
|
|
4425 |
|
|
Do you want runtime configuration for QIC-02
|
4426 |
|
|
CONFIG_QIC02_DYNCONF
|
4427 |
|
|
You can either configure this driver once and for all by editing a
|
4428 |
|
|
header file, in which case you should say N, or you can fetch a
|
4429 |
|
|
program via anonymous FTP which is able to configure this driver
|
4430 |
|
|
during runtime. If you want this, say Y.
|
4431 |
|
|
|
4432 |
|
|
Ftape (QIC-80/Travan) support
|
4433 |
|
|
CONFIG_FTAPE
|
4434 |
|
|
If you have a tape drive that is connected to your floppy
|
4435 |
|
|
controller, say Y here. Some tape drives (like the Iomega Ditto
|
4436 |
|
|
3200) come with a high speed controller of its own. These drives
|
4437 |
|
|
(and their companion controller) is also supported. If you have a
|
4438 |
|
|
special controller (such as the CMS FC-10, FC-20, Iomega Mach-II, or
|
4439 |
|
|
Ditto Dash), you must configure it by editing the file
|
4440 |
|
|
drivers/char/ftape/Makefile. If you want to use such a tape drive on
|
4441 |
|
|
a PCI-bus based system, please read the file
|
4442 |
|
|
drivers/char/ftape/README.PCI. This driver is also available as a
|
4443 |
|
|
runtime loadable module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4444 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to
|
4445 |
|
|
compile it as a module, say M here and read
|
4446 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4447 |
|
|
|
4448 |
|
|
Zilog serial support
|
4449 |
|
|
CONFIG_SUN_ZS
|
4450 |
|
|
This driver does not exist at this point, so you might as well
|
4451 |
|
|
say N.
|
4452 |
|
|
|
4453 |
|
|
Advanced Power Management
|
4454 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM
|
4455 |
|
|
APM is a BIOS specification for saving power using several different
|
4456 |
|
|
techniques. This is mostly useful for battery powered laptops with
|
4457 |
|
|
APM compliant BIOSes. Specifically, the time will be reset after a
|
4458 |
|
|
USER RESUME operation, the /proc/apm device will provide battery
|
4459 |
|
|
status information, and user-space programs will receive
|
4460 |
|
|
notification of APM "events" (e.g., battery status change). This
|
4461 |
|
|
driver does not spin down disk drives (see hdparm(8) for that); and
|
4462 |
|
|
it doesn't turn off VESA-compliant "green" monitors. This driver
|
4463 |
|
|
does not support the TI 4000M TravelMate and the ACER 486/DX4/75
|
4464 |
|
|
because they don't have compliant BIOSes. Many "green" desktop
|
4465 |
|
|
machines also don't have compliant BIOSes, and this driver will
|
4466 |
|
|
cause those machines to panic during the boot phase (typically,
|
4467 |
|
|
these machines are using a data segment of 0040, which is reserved
|
4468 |
|
|
for the Linux kernel). If you get random kernel OOPSes that don't
|
4469 |
|
|
seem to be related to anything and you have a motherboard with APM
|
4470 |
|
|
support, try disabling/enabling this option. Generally, if you don't
|
4471 |
|
|
have a battery in your machine, there isn't much point in using this
|
4472 |
|
|
driver.
|
4473 |
|
|
|
4474 |
|
|
Ignore USER SUSPEND
|
4475 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_IGNORE_USER_SUSPEND
|
4476 |
|
|
This option will ignore USER SUSPEND requests. On machines with a
|
4477 |
|
|
compliant APM BIOS, you want to say N. However, on the NEC Versa M
|
4478 |
|
|
series notebooks, it is necessary to say Y because of a BIOS bug.
|
4479 |
|
|
|
4480 |
|
|
Enable APM at boot time
|
4481 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_DO_ENABLE
|
4482 |
|
|
Enable APM features at boot time. From page 36 of the APM BIOS
|
4483 |
|
|
specification: "When disabled, the APM BIOS does not automatically
|
4484 |
|
|
power manage devices, enter the Standby State, enter the Suspend
|
4485 |
|
|
State, or take power saving steps in response to CPU Idle calls."
|
4486 |
|
|
This driver will make CPU Idle calls when Linux is idle (unless this
|
4487 |
|
|
feature is turned off -- see below). This should always save
|
4488 |
|
|
battery power, but more complicated APM features will be dependent
|
4489 |
|
|
on your BIOS implementation. You may need to turn this option off
|
4490 |
|
|
if your computer hangs at boot time when using APM support, or if it
|
4491 |
|
|
beeps continuously instead of suspending. Turn this off if you have
|
4492 |
|
|
a NEC UltraLite Versa 33/C or a Toshiba T400CDT. This is off by
|
4493 |
|
|
default since most machines do fine without this feature.
|
4494 |
|
|
|
4495 |
|
|
Do CPU IDLE calls
|
4496 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_CPU_IDLE
|
4497 |
|
|
Enable calls to APM CPU Idle/CPU Busy inside the kernel's idle loop.
|
4498 |
|
|
On some machines, this can activate improved power savings, such as
|
4499 |
|
|
a slowed CPU clock rate, when the machine is idle. These idle calls
|
4500 |
|
|
are made after the idle loop has run for some length of time (e.g.,
|
4501 |
|
|
333 ms). On some machines, this will cause a hang at boot time or
|
4502 |
|
|
whenever the CPU becomes idle. (On machines with more than one CPU,
|
4503 |
|
|
this option does nothing.)
|
4504 |
|
|
|
4505 |
|
|
Enable console blanking using APM
|
4506 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_DISPLAY_BLANK
|
4507 |
|
|
Enable console blanking using the APM. Some laptops can use this to
|
4508 |
|
|
turn off the LCD backlight when the VC screen blanker blanks the
|
4509 |
|
|
screen. Note that this is only used by the VC screen blanker, and
|
4510 |
|
|
won't turn off the backlight when using X11 (this also doesn't have
|
4511 |
|
|
anything to do with your VESA-compliant power-saving monitor).
|
4512 |
|
|
Further, this option doesn't work for all laptops -- it might not
|
4513 |
|
|
turn off your backlight at all, or it might print a lot of errors to
|
4514 |
|
|
the console, especially if you are using gpm.
|
4515 |
|
|
|
4516 |
|
|
Power off on shutdown
|
4517 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_POWER_OFF
|
4518 |
|
|
This option will power off the computer after the Linux kernel is
|
4519 |
|
|
halted (e.g., with the halt(8) command). As with the other APM
|
4520 |
|
|
options, this option may not work reliably with some APM BIOS
|
4521 |
|
|
implementations.
|
4522 |
|
|
|
4523 |
|
|
Ignore multiple suspend/standby events
|
4524 |
|
|
CONFIG_APM_IGNORE_MULTIPLE_SUSPEND
|
4525 |
|
|
This option is necessary on the Thinkpad 560, but should work on all
|
4526 |
|
|
other laptops. When the APM BIOS returns multiple suspend or standby
|
4527 |
|
|
events while one is already being processed they will be ignored.
|
4528 |
|
|
Without this the Thinkpad 560 has troubles with apmd, and pcmcia-cs.
|
4529 |
|
|
|
4530 |
|
|
Watchdog Timer Support
|
4531 |
|
|
CONFIG_WATCHDOG
|
4532 |
|
|
If you enable this option and create a character special file
|
4533 |
|
|
/dev/watchdog with major number 10 and minor number 130 using mknod
|
4534 |
|
|
("man mknod"), you will get a watchdog, i.e.: subsequently opening
|
4535 |
|
|
the file and failing to write to it for longer than 1 minute will
|
4536 |
|
|
result in rebooting the machine. This could be useful for a
|
4537 |
|
|
networked machine that needs to come back online as fast as possible
|
4538 |
|
|
after a lock-up. There's a watchdog implementation entirely in
|
4539 |
|
|
software (which can sometimes fail to reboot the machine) and a
|
4540 |
|
|
driver for hardware watchdog boards, which are more robust and can
|
4541 |
|
|
also keep track of the temperature inside your computer. For
|
4542 |
|
|
details, read Documentation/watchdog.txt in the kernel source. If
|
4543 |
|
|
unsure, say N. This driver is also available as a module ( = code
|
4544 |
|
|
which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
4545 |
|
|
whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M
|
4546 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4547 |
|
|
|
4548 |
|
|
Disable watchdog shutdown on close
|
4549 |
|
|
CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT
|
4550 |
|
|
The default watchdog behaviour is to stop the timer if the process
|
4551 |
|
|
managing it closes the file /dev/watchdog. It's always remotely
|
4552 |
|
|
possible that this process might get killed. If you enable this
|
4553 |
|
|
option, the watchdog cannot be stopped once it has been started.
|
4554 |
|
|
|
4555 |
|
|
WDT Watchdog timer
|
4556 |
|
|
CONFIG_WDT
|
4557 |
|
|
If you have a WDT500P or WDT501P watchdog board, say Y here,
|
4558 |
|
|
otherwise N. It is not possible to probe for this board, which means
|
4559 |
|
|
that you have to set the IO port and IRQ it uses in the kernel
|
4560 |
|
|
source at the top of drivers/char/wdt.c. If you want to compile this
|
4561 |
|
|
as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed from the
|
4562 |
|
|
running kernel whenever you want), say M here and read
|
4563 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4564 |
|
|
|
4565 |
|
|
WDT501 features
|
4566 |
|
|
CONFIG_WDT_501
|
4567 |
|
|
Saying Y here and creating a character special file /dev/temperature
|
4568 |
|
|
with major number 10 and minor number 131 ("man mknod") will give
|
4569 |
|
|
you a thermometer inside your computer: reading from
|
4570 |
|
|
/dev/temperature yields one byte, the temperature in degrees
|
4571 |
|
|
Fahrenheit. This works only if you have a WDT501P watchdog board
|
4572 |
|
|
installed.
|
4573 |
|
|
|
4574 |
|
|
Fan Tachometer
|
4575 |
|
|
CONFIG_WDT_501_FAN
|
4576 |
|
|
Enable the Fan Tachometer on the WDT501. Only do this if you have
|
4577 |
|
|
a fan tachometer actually set up.
|
4578 |
|
|
|
4579 |
|
|
Software Watchdog
|
4580 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOFT_WATCHDOG
|
4581 |
|
|
A software monitoring watchdog. This will fail to reboot your system
|
4582 |
|
|
from some situations that the hardware watchdog will recover
|
4583 |
|
|
from. Equally it's a lot cheaper to install. This driver is also
|
4584 |
|
|
available as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and removed
|
4585 |
|
|
from the running kernel whenever you want). If you want to compile
|
4586 |
|
|
it as a module, say M here and read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4587 |
|
|
|
4588 |
|
|
Berkshire Products PC Watchdog card
|
4589 |
|
|
CONFIG_PCWATCHDOG
|
4590 |
|
|
This is the driver for the Berkshire Products PC Watchdog card.
|
4591 |
|
|
This card simply watches your kernel to make sure it doesn't freeze,
|
4592 |
|
|
and if it does, it resets your computer after a certain amount of
|
4593 |
|
|
time. This driver is like the WDT501 driver but for different
|
4594 |
|
|
hardware. The PC watchdog cards can be ordered from
|
4595 |
|
|
http://www.berkprod.com. Some example rc.local files are available
|
4596 |
|
|
from ftp.bitgate.com. This driver is also available as a module ( =
|
4597 |
|
|
code which can be inserted in and removed from the running kernel
|
4598 |
|
|
whenever you want). If you want to compile it as a module, say M
|
4599 |
|
|
here and read Documentation/modules.txt. Most people will say N.
|
4600 |
|
|
|
4601 |
|
|
Enhanced Real Time Clock Support
|
4602 |
|
|
CONFIG_RTC
|
4603 |
|
|
If you enable this option and create a character special file
|
4604 |
|
|
/dev/rtc with major number 10 and minor number 135 using mknod ("man
|
4605 |
|
|
mknod"), you will get access to the real time clock built into your
|
4606 |
|
|
computer. Every PC has such a clock built in. It can be used to
|
4607 |
|
|
generate signals from as low as 1Hz up to 8192Hz, and can also be
|
4608 |
|
|
used as a 24 hour alarm. It reports status information via the file
|
4609 |
|
|
/proc/rtc and its behaviour is set by various ioctls on /dev/rtc.
|
4610 |
|
|
People running SMP ( = multiprocessor) versions of Linux should
|
4611 |
|
|
enable this option to read and set the RTC clock in a SMP compatible
|
4612 |
|
|
fashion. If you think you have a use for such a device (such as
|
4613 |
|
|
periodic data sampling), then say Y here, and go read the file
|
4614 |
|
|
Documentation/rtc.txt for details.
|
4615 |
|
|
|
4616 |
|
|
Sound card support
|
4617 |
|
|
CONFIG_SOUND
|
4618 |
|
|
If you have a Sound Card in your Computer, i.e. if it can say more
|
4619 |
|
|
than an occasional beep, say Y. Be sure to have all the information
|
4620 |
|
|
about your sound card and its configuration down (I/O port,
|
4621 |
|
|
interrupt and DMA channel), because you will be asked for it. You
|
4622 |
|
|
want to read the Sound-HOWTO, available via FTP (user: anonymous)
|
4623 |
|
|
from sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO. There is also some
|
4624 |
|
|
information in various README files in drivers/sound. If you want
|
4625 |
|
|
to compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
4626 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M here and
|
4627 |
|
|
read Documentation/modules.txt.
|
4628 |
|
|
I'm told that even without a sound card, you can make your computer
|
4629 |
|
|
say more than an occasional beep, by programming the PC speaker.
|
4630 |
|
|
Kernel patches and programs to do that are at sunsite.unc.edu:
|
4631 |
|
|
/pub/Linux/kernel/patches/console/pcsndrv-X.X.tar.gz,
|
4632 |
|
|
to be extracted with "tar xzvf filename".
|
4633 |
|
|
|
4634 |
|
|
ProAudioSpectrum 16 support
|
4635 |
|
|
CONFIG_PAS
|
4636 |
|
|
Answer Y only if you have a Pro Audio Spectrum 16, ProAudio Studio
|
4637 |
|
|
16 or Logitech SoundMan 16. Don't answer 'y' if you have some other
|
4638 |
|
|
card made by Media Vision or Logitech since they are not PAS16
|
4639 |
|
|
compatible.
|
4640 |
|
|
|
4641 |
|
|
SoundBlaster (SB, SBPro, SB16, clones) support
|
4642 |
|
|
CONFIG_SB
|
4643 |
|
|
Answer "y" if you have an original SoundBlaster card made by
|
4644 |
|
|
Creative Labs or a 100% hardware compatible clone (like the
|
4645 |
|
|
Thunderboard or SM Games). If your card was in the list of supported
|
4646 |
|
|
cards look at the card specific instructions in the
|
4647 |
|
|
drivers/sound/Readme.cards file before answering this question. For
|
4648 |
|
|
an unknown card you may answer Y if the card claims to be
|
4649 |
|
|
SoundBlaster compatible.
|
4650 |
|
|
|
4651 |
|
|
Generic OPL2/OPL3 FM synthesizer support
|
4652 |
|
|
CONFIG_ADLIB
|
4653 |
|
|
Answer Y if your card has a FM chip made by Yamaha (OPL2/OPL3/OPL4).
|
4654 |
|
|
Answering Y is usually a safe and recommended choice, however some
|
4655 |
|
|
cards may have software (TSR) FM emulation. Enabling FM support with
|
4656 |
|
|
these cards may cause trouble (I don't currently know of any such
|
4657 |
|
|
cards, however).
|
4658 |
|
|
|
4659 |
|
|
Gravis Ultrasound support
|
4660 |
|
|
CONFIG_GUS
|
4661 |
|
|
Enable this option for any type of Gravis Ultrasound card, including
|
4662 |
|
|
the GUS or GUS MAX.
|
4663 |
|
|
|
4664 |
|
|
MPU-401 support (NOT for SB16)
|
4665 |
|
|
CONFIG_MPU401
|
4666 |
|
|
Be careful with this question. The MPU401 interface is supported by
|
4667 |
|
|
all sound cards. However, some natively supported cards have their
|
4668 |
|
|
own driver for MPU401. Enabling the MPU401 option with these cards
|
4669 |
|
|
will cause a conflict. Also, enabling MPU401 on a system that
|
4670 |
|
|
doesn't really have a MPU401 could cause some trouble. If your card
|
4671 |
|
|
was in the list of supported cards, look at the card specific
|
4672 |
|
|
instructions in the drivers/sound/Readme.cards file. It's safe to
|
4673 |
|
|
answer Y if you have a true MPU401 MIDI interface card.
|
4674 |
|
|
|
4675 |
|
|
6850 UART Midi support
|
4676 |
|
|
CONFIG_UART6850
|
4677 |
|
|
This option enables support for MIDI interfaces based on the 6850
|
4678 |
|
|
UART chip. This interface is rarely found on sound cards. It's safe
|
4679 |
|
|
to answer N to this question.
|
4680 |
|
|
|
4681 |
|
|
PSS (ECHO-ADI2111) support
|
4682 |
|
|
CONFIG_PSS
|
4683 |
|
|
Answer Y only if you have Orchid SW32, Cardinal DSP16 or some other
|
4684 |
|
|
card based on the PSS chipset (AD1848 codec + ADSP-2115 DSP chip +
|
4685 |
|
|
Echo ESC614 ASIC CHIP).
|
4686 |
|
|
|
4687 |
|
|
16 bit sampling option of GUS (_NOT_ GUS MAX)
|
4688 |
|
|
CONFIG_GUS16
|
4689 |
|
|
Answer Y if you have installed the 16 bit sampling daughtercard on
|
4690 |
|
|
your GUS. Answer N if you have a GUS MAX, since enabling this
|
4691 |
|
|
option disables GUS MAX support.
|
4692 |
|
|
|
4693 |
|
|
GUS MAX support
|
4694 |
|
|
CONFIG_GUSMAX
|
4695 |
|
|
Answer Y only if you have a Gravis Ultrasound MAX.
|
4696 |
|
|
|
4697 |
|
|
Microsoft Sound System support
|
4698 |
|
|
CONFIG_MSS
|
4699 |
|
|
Again think carefully before answering Y to this question. It's
|
4700 |
|
|
safe to answer Y if you have the original Windows Sound System card
|
4701 |
|
|
made by Microsoft or Aztech SG 16 Pro (or NX16 Pro). Also you may
|
4702 |
|
|
answer Y in case your card is NOT among these:
|
4703 |
|
|
ATI Stereo F/X, AdLib, Audio Excell DSP16, Cardinal DSP16,
|
4704 |
|
|
Ensoniq SoundScape (and compatibles made by Reveal and Spea),
|
4705 |
|
|
Gravis Ultrasound, Gravis Ultrasound ACE, Gravis Ultrasound Max,
|
4706 |
|
|
Gravis Ultrasound with 16 bit option, Logitech Sound Man 16,
|
4707 |
|
|
Logitech SoundMan Games, Logitech SoundMan Wave, MAD16 Pro (OPTi
|
4708 |
|
|
82C929), Media Vision Jazz16, MediaTriX AudioTriX Pro, Microsoft
|
4709 |
|
|
Windows Sound System (MSS/WSS), Mozart (OAK OTI-601), Orchid
|
4710 |
|
|
SW32, Personal Sound System (PSS), Pro Audio Spectrum 16, Pro
|
4711 |
|
|
Audio Studio 16, Pro Sonic 16, Roland MPU-401 MIDI interface,
|
4712 |
|
|
Sound Blaster 1.0, Sound Blaster 16, Sound Blaster 16ASP, Sound
|
4713 |
|
|
Blaster 2.0, Sound Blaster AWE32, Sound Blaster Pro, TI TM4000M
|
4714 |
|
|
notebook, ThunderBoard, Turtle Beach Tropez, Yamaha FM
|
4715 |
|
|
synthesizers (OPL2, OPL3 and OPL4), 6850 UART MIDI Interface.
|
4716 |
|
|
For cards having native support in VoxWare, consult the card
|
4717 |
|
|
specific instructions in drivers/sound/Readme.cards. Some drivers
|
4718 |
|
|
have their own MSS support and enabling this option will cause a
|
4719 |
|
|
conflict.
|
4720 |
|
|
|
4721 |
|
|
Ensoniq Soundscape support
|
4722 |
|
|
CONFIG_SSCAPE
|
4723 |
|
|
Answer Y if you have a sound card based on the Ensoniq SoundScape
|
4724 |
|
|
chipset. Such cards are being manufactured at least by Ensoniq, Spea
|
4725 |
|
|
and Reveal (Reveal makes also other cards).
|
4726 |
|
|
|
4727 |
|
|
MediaTriX AudioTriX Pro support
|
4728 |
|
|
CONFIG_TRIX
|
4729 |
|
|
Answer Y if you have the AudioTriX Pro sound card manufactured
|
4730 |
|
|
by MediaTrix.
|
4731 |
|
|
|
4732 |
|
|
Support for MAD16 and/or Mozart based cards
|
4733 |
|
|
CONFIG_MAD16
|
4734 |
|
|
Answer Y if your card has a Mozart (OAK OTI-601) or MAD16
|
4735 |
|
|
(OPTi 82C928 or 82C929) audio interface chip. These chips are
|
4736 |
|
|
currently quite common so it's possible that many no-name cards
|
4737 |
|
|
have one of them. In addition the MAD16 chip is used in some
|
4738 |
|
|
cards made by known manufacturers such as Turtle Beach (Tropez),
|
4739 |
|
|
Reveal (some models) and Diamond (latest ones).
|
4740 |
|
|
|
4741 |
|
|
Support for Crystal CS4232 based (PnP) cards
|
4742 |
|
|
CONFIG_CS4232
|
4743 |
|
|
Enable this if you have a card based on the Crystal CS4232 chip set.
|
4744 |
|
|
|
4745 |
|
|
Support for Turtle Beach Wave Front (Maui, Tropez) synthesizers
|
4746 |
|
|
CONFIG_MAUI
|
4747 |
|
|
Enable this option if you have a Turtle Beach Wave Front, Maui, or
|
4748 |
|
|
Tropez sound card.
|
4749 |
|
|
|
4750 |
|
|
/dev/dsp and /dev/audio support
|
4751 |
|
|
CONFIG_AUDIO
|
4752 |
|
|
Answering N disables /dev/dsp and /dev/audio, the A/D and D/A
|
4753 |
|
|
converter devices. Answer N only if you know you will not need
|
4754 |
|
|
the option. They are usually required. Answer Y.
|
4755 |
|
|
|
4756 |
|
|
MIDI interface support
|
4757 |
|
|
CONFIG_MIDI
|
4758 |
|
|
Answering N disables /dev/midixx devices and access to any MIDI
|
4759 |
|
|
ports using /dev/sequencer and /dev/music. This option also affects
|
4760 |
|
|
any MPU401 and/or General MIDI compatible devices. Answer Y.
|
4761 |
|
|
|
4762 |
|
|
FM synthesizer (YM3812/OPL-3) support
|
4763 |
|
|
CONFIG_YM3812
|
4764 |
|
|
Answer Y here, unless you know you will not need the option.
|
4765 |
|
|
|
4766 |
|
|
Sun Audio support
|
4767 |
|
|
CONFIG_SUN_AUDIO
|
4768 |
|
|
This is support for the sound cards on Sun workstations. The code
|
4769 |
|
|
does not exist yet, so you might as well say N here.
|
4770 |
|
|
|
4771 |
|
|
Kernel profiling support
|
4772 |
|
|
CONFIG_PROFILE
|
4773 |
|
|
This is for kernel hackers who want to know how much time the kernel
|
4774 |
|
|
spends in the various procedures. The information is stored in
|
4775 |
|
|
/proc/profile (enable the /proc filesystem!) and in order to read
|
4776 |
|
|
it, you need the readprofile package from sunsite.unc.edu. Its
|
4777 |
|
|
manpage gives information regarding the format of profiling data. To
|
4778 |
|
|
become a kernel hacker, you can start with the Kernel Hacker's
|
4779 |
|
|
Guide, available via FTP (user: anonymous) from
|
4780 |
|
|
sunsite.unc.edu:/pub/Linux/docs/LDP. Mere mortals say N.
|
4781 |
|
|
|
4782 |
|
|
Profile shift count
|
4783 |
|
|
CONFIG_PROFILE_SHIFT
|
4784 |
|
|
This is used to adjust the granularity with which the addresses of
|
4785 |
|
|
executed instructions get recorded in /proc/profile. But since you
|
4786 |
|
|
enabled "Kernel profiling support", you must be a kernel hacker and
|
4787 |
|
|
hence you know what this is about :-)
|
4788 |
|
|
|
4789 |
|
|
ISDN subsystem
|
4790 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN
|
4791 |
|
|
ISDN ("Integrated Services Digital Networks", called RNIS in
|
4792 |
|
|
France) is a special type of fully digital telephone line; it's
|
4793 |
|
|
mostly used to connect to your Internet service provider (with SLIP
|
4794 |
|
|
or PPP). The main advantage is that the speed is higher than
|
4795 |
|
|
ordinary modem/telephone connections. It only works if your computer
|
4796 |
|
|
is equipped with an ISDN card and both you and your service provider
|
4797 |
|
|
purchased an ISDN line from your phone company. For details, read
|
4798 |
|
|
http://alumni.caltech.edu/~dank/isdn/ on the WWW. (To browse the
|
4799 |
|
|
WWW, you need to have access to a machine on the Internet that has
|
4800 |
|
|
one of the programs lynx, netscape or Mosaic.) This driver allows
|
4801 |
|
|
you to use an ISDN-card for networking connections and as dialin/out
|
4802 |
|
|
device. The isdn-tty's have a built in AT-compatible modem
|
4803 |
|
|
emulator. Network devices support autodial, channel-bundling,
|
4804 |
|
|
callback and caller-authentication without having a daemon
|
4805 |
|
|
running. A reduced T.70 protocol is supported with tty's suitable
|
4806 |
|
|
for German BTX. On D-Channel, the protocols EDSS1 and 1TR6 are
|
4807 |
|
|
supported. See Documentation/isdn/README for more information.
|
4808 |
|
|
|
4809 |
|
|
Support synchronous PPP
|
4810 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_PPP
|
4811 |
|
|
This enables synchronous PPP via ISDN. This protocol is used by
|
4812 |
|
|
Cisco or Sun for example. So you want say Y here if the other end of
|
4813 |
|
|
your ISDN connection supports it. You will need a special version of
|
4814 |
|
|
pppd (called ipppd) for using this feature. See
|
4815 |
|
|
Documentation/isdn/README.syncppp and Documentation/isdn/syncPPP.FAQ
|
4816 |
|
|
for more information.
|
4817 |
|
|
|
4818 |
|
|
Support generic MP (RFC 1717)
|
4819 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_MPP
|
4820 |
|
|
With synchronous PPP enabled, it is possible to increase throughput
|
4821 |
|
|
by bundling several ISDN-connections, using this protocol.
|
4822 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.syncppp for more information.
|
4823 |
|
|
|
4824 |
|
|
Use VJ-compression with synchronous PPP
|
4825 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_PPP_VJ
|
4826 |
|
|
This enables Van Jacobson header compression for synchronous PPP.
|
4827 |
|
|
|
4828 |
|
|
Support audio via ISDN
|
4829 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_AUDIO
|
4830 |
|
|
With this option enabled, the modem-emulator supports a subset
|
4831 |
|
|
of the EIA Class 8 Voice commands. Using a getty with voice-support
|
4832 |
|
|
(mgetty+sendfax by gert@greenie.muc.de with an extension, available
|
4833 |
|
|
with the ISDN utility package for example), you will be able
|
4834 |
|
|
to use your Linux box as an ISDN-answering machine. Of course, this
|
4835 |
|
|
must be supported by the lowlevel driver also. Currently HiSax
|
4836 |
|
|
driver is the only voice-supporting drivers. See
|
4837 |
|
|
Documentation/isdn/README.audio for more information.
|
4838 |
|
|
|
4839 |
|
|
ICN 2B and 4B support
|
4840 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_DRV_ICN
|
4841 |
|
|
This enables support for two kinds of ISDN-cards made by a German
|
4842 |
|
|
company called ICN. 2B is the standard version for a single ISDN
|
4843 |
|
|
line with two B-channels, 4B supports two ISDN lines. For running
|
4844 |
|
|
this card, additional firmware is necessary, which has to be
|
4845 |
|
|
downloaded into the card using a utility which is distributed
|
4846 |
|
|
separately. See Documentation/isdn/README and README.icn for more
|
4847 |
|
|
information.
|
4848 |
|
|
|
4849 |
|
|
HiSax SiemensChipSet driver support
|
4850 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_DRV_HISAX
|
4851 |
|
|
This driver replaces the old Teles driver. It supports the Siemens
|
4852 |
|
|
chipset in a more general way. This chipset is used on various
|
4853 |
|
|
ISDN-cards (like AVM A1, Elsa ISDN cards, Teles S0-16.0,
|
4854 |
|
|
Teles S0-16.3, Teles S0-8, Teles/Creatix PnP, ITK micro ix1 and
|
4855 |
|
|
many compatibles). It supports other chipsets too.
|
4856 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax for further informations on
|
4857 |
|
|
using this driver.
|
4858 |
|
|
|
4859 |
|
|
HiSax Support for EURO/DSS1
|
4860 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_EURO
|
4861 |
|
|
Enable this if you have a EURO ISDN line.
|
4862 |
|
|
|
4863 |
|
|
Support for german chargeinfo
|
4864 |
|
|
CONFIG_DE_AOC
|
4865 |
|
|
If you have german AOC, you can enable this to get the charginfo.
|
4866 |
|
|
|
4867 |
|
|
Disable sending complete
|
4868 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_NO_SENDCOMPLETE
|
4869 |
|
|
If you have trouble with some ugly exchanges or you live in
|
4870 |
|
|
Australia select this option.
|
4871 |
|
|
|
4872 |
|
|
Disable sending low layer compatibility
|
4873 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_NO_LLC
|
4874 |
|
|
If you have trouble with some ugly exchanges try to select this
|
4875 |
|
|
option.
|
4876 |
|
|
|
4877 |
|
|
HiSax Support for german 1TR6
|
4878 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_1TR6
|
4879 |
|
|
Enable this if you have a old german 1TR6 line.
|
4880 |
|
|
Note: Many older local switches are using 1TR6 on internal S0.
|
4881 |
|
|
|
4882 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Teles 16.0/8.0
|
4883 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_16_0
|
4884 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the Teles ISDN-cards S0-16.0,
|
4885 |
|
|
S0-8 and many compatibles.
|
4886 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it using the
|
4887 |
|
|
different cards, a different D-channel protocol, or non-standard
|
4888 |
|
|
IRQ/port/shmem settings.
|
4889 |
|
|
|
4890 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Teles 16.3 or PNP or PCMCIA
|
4891 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_16_3
|
4892 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the Teles ISDN-cards S0-16.3
|
4893 |
|
|
the Teles/Creatix PnP and the Teles PCMCIA.
|
4894 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it using the
|
4895 |
|
|
different cards, a different D-channel protocol, or non-standard
|
4896 |
|
|
IRQ/port settings.
|
4897 |
|
|
|
4898 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Teles 16.3c
|
4899 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_TELES3C
|
4900 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the Teles 16.3c PnP.
|
4901 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4902 |
|
|
|
4903 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Teles PCI
|
4904 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_TELESPCI
|
4905 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the Teles PCI.
|
4906 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4907 |
|
|
|
4908 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Teles S0Box
|
4909 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_S0BOX
|
4910 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the Teles/Creatix parallel port
|
4911 |
|
|
S0BOX. See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4912 |
|
|
|
4913 |
|
|
HiSax Support for AVM A1 (Fritz)
|
4914 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_AVM_A1
|
4915 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the AVM A1 (aka "Fritz!").
|
4916 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it using the
|
4917 |
|
|
different cards, a different D-channel protocol, or non-standard
|
4918 |
|
|
IRQ/port settings.
|
4919 |
|
|
|
4920 |
|
|
HiSax Support for AVM PnP/PCI (Fritz!PNP/PCI)
|
4921 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_FRITZPCI
|
4922 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the AVM "Fritz!PnP" and "Fritz!PCI".
|
4923 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4924 |
|
|
|
4925 |
|
|
HiSax Support for AVM A1 PCMCIA (Fritz)
|
4926 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_AVM_A1_PCMCIA
|
4927 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the AVM A1 "Fritz!PCMCIA").
|
4928 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4929 |
|
|
|
4930 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Elsa ISA cards
|
4931 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_ELSA
|
4932 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for all Elsa cards.
|
4933 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it using the
|
4934 |
|
|
different cards, a different D-channel protocol, or non-standard
|
4935 |
|
|
IRQ/port settings.
|
4936 |
|
|
|
4937 |
|
|
|
4938 |
|
|
HiSax Support for ITK ix1-micro Revision 2
|
4939 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_IX1MICROR2
|
4940 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the ITK ix1-micro Revision 2 card.
|
4941 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4942 |
|
|
|
4943 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Eicon.Diehl Diva cards
|
4944 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_DIEHLDIVA
|
4945 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for all none Pro versions of
|
4946 |
|
|
Eicon.Diehl's Diva series passiv cards.
|
4947 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4948 |
|
|
|
4949 |
|
|
HiSax Support for ASUSCOM cards
|
4950 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_ASUSCOM
|
4951 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for all passiv AsusCom and AsusComs OEM cards,
|
4952 |
|
|
e.g PCBIT-DP, Dynalink and much more.
|
4953 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4954 |
|
|
|
4955 |
|
|
HiSax Support for TELEINT cards
|
4956 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_TELEINT
|
4957 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for TeleInts semi-activ card and for
|
4958 |
|
|
other HFC-2BS0 based cards.
|
4959 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4960 |
|
|
|
4961 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Sedlbauer cards
|
4962 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_SEDLBAUER
|
4963 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for all Sedlbauer passiv cards such as
|
4964 |
|
|
Sedlbauer Speed Card (Speed Win, Teledat 100), Speed Star
|
4965 |
|
|
and Speed Star2 (PCMCIA), ISDN-Controller PC/104, Speed PCI and
|
4966 |
|
|
Speed Fax+.
|
4967 |
|
|
|
4968 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4969 |
|
|
|
4970 |
|
|
HiSax Support for USR Sportster internal TA
|
4971 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_SPORTSTER
|
4972 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the USR (3Com) Sportster internal TA
|
4973 |
|
|
passiv card.
|
4974 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4975 |
|
|
|
4976 |
|
|
HiSax Support for MIC card
|
4977 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_MIC
|
4978 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the MIC passiv card.
|
4979 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4980 |
|
|
|
4981 |
|
|
HiSax Support for NETjet card
|
4982 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_NETJET
|
4983 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for the NetJet PCI and maybe for other
|
4984 |
|
|
Tiger300 based passiv cards.
|
4985 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4986 |
|
|
|
4987 |
|
|
HiSax Support for Niccy PnP/PCI card
|
4988 |
|
|
CONFIG_HISAX_NICCY
|
4989 |
|
|
This enables HiSax support for Dr. Neuhaus (Sagem) Niccy series
|
4990 |
|
|
passiv cards.
|
4991 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax on how to configure it.
|
4992 |
|
|
|
4993 |
|
|
PCBIT-D support
|
4994 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_DRV_PCBIT
|
4995 |
|
|
This enables support for the PCBIT ISDN-cards. This card is
|
4996 |
|
|
manufactured in Portugal by Octal. For running this card, additional
|
4997 |
|
|
firmware is necessary, which has to be downloaded into the card
|
4998 |
|
|
using a utility which is distributed separately.
|
4999 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README and Documentation/isdn/README.pcbit
|
5000 |
|
|
for more information.
|
5001 |
|
|
|
5002 |
|
|
Spellcaster support (EXPERIMENTAL)
|
5003 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_DRV_SC
|
5004 |
|
|
This enables support for the Spellcaster BRI boards. This driver
|
5005 |
|
|
currently builds in a modularized version only.
|
5006 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.sc and http://www.spellcast.com
|
5007 |
|
|
for more information.
|
5008 |
|
|
|
5009 |
|
|
AVM-B1 with CAPI2.0 support
|
5010 |
|
|
CONFIG_ISDN_DRV_AVMB1
|
5011 |
|
|
This enables support for the AVM B1 card and also adds a CAPI2.0
|
5012 |
|
|
interface for this card. For running this card, additional firmware
|
5013 |
|
|
is necessary, which has to be downloaded into the card using a
|
5014 |
|
|
utility which is distributed separately.
|
5015 |
|
|
See Documentation/isdn/README.avmb1 for more information.
|
5016 |
|
|
|
5017 |
|
|
Support for AP1000 multicomputer
|
5018 |
|
|
CONFIG_AP1000
|
5019 |
|
|
This enables support for a SPARC based parallel multi-computer
|
5020 |
|
|
called an AP1000+. For details on our efforts to port Linux to this
|
5021 |
|
|
machine see http://cap.anu.edu.au/cap/projects/linux or mail to
|
5022 |
|
|
hackers@cafe.anu.edu.au
|
5023 |
|
|
|
5024 |
|
|
SPARC ESP SCSI support
|
5025 |
|
|
CONFIG_SCSI_SUNESP
|
5026 |
|
|
This is the driver for the Sun ESP SCSI host adapter. The ESP
|
5027 |
|
|
chipset is present in most SPARC-based computers.
|
5028 |
|
|
|
5029 |
|
|
SPARC /dev/openprom compatibility driver
|
5030 |
|
|
CONFIG_SUN_OPENPROMIO
|
5031 |
|
|
This driver provides user programs with an interface to the SPARC
|
5032 |
|
|
PROM device tree. The driver implements a SunOS-compatible
|
5033 |
|
|
interface and a NetBSD-compatible interface. If you want to
|
5034 |
|
|
compile this as a module ( = code which can be inserted in and
|
5035 |
|
|
removed from the running kernel whenever you want), say M and read
|
5036 |
|
|
Documentation/modules.txt. If unsure, say Y.
|
5037 |
|
|
|
5038 |
|
|
Handle buggy SMP BIOSes with bad MTRR setup
|
5039 |
|
|
CONFIG_MTRR
|
5040 |
|
|
Some BIOSes for MP1.1/MP1.4 SMP machines fail to set the MTRR
|
5041 |
|
|
registers in the chips up correctly as the specification and Intel
|
5042 |
|
|
rules require. If you have a PPro or later SMP and one or more CPU's
|
5043 |
|
|
report a value of about 2-3 bogomips enable this.
|
5044 |
|
|
|
5045 |
|
|
Nemory configuration
|
5046 |
|
|
CONFIG_MEM_STD
|
5047 |
|
|
There are three memory configurations available. The standard
|
5048 |
|
|
configuration allows use of just under 1GB of RAM with 3GB of
|
5049 |
|
|
virtual space per process. The enterprise configuration allows
|
5050 |
|
|
2Gigabytes of physical memory but limits the per process address
|
5051 |
|
|
space to 2Gigabytes. The custom option allows you to specify the
|
5052 |
|
|
split subject to kernel constraints. If you don't know how it works
|
5053 |
|
|
don't pick it.
|
5054 |
|
|
|
5055 |
|
|
# need an empty line after last entry, for sed script in Configure.
|
5056 |
|
|
|
5057 |
|
|
#
|
5058 |
|
|
# This is used by ispell.el:
|
5059 |
|
|
#
|
5060 |
|
|
# LocalWords: CONFIG coprocessor DX Pentium SX lilo loadlin HOWTO ftp sunsite
|
5061 |
|
|
# LocalWords: unc edu docs emu README kB BLK DEV FD Thinkpad fd MFM RLL IDE gz
|
5062 |
|
|
# LocalWords: cdrom diskless netboot nfs xzvf ATAPI MB ide
|
5063 |
|
|
# LocalWords: HD CDROMs IDECD NEC MITSUMI filesystem XT XD PCI bios
|
5064 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ISA EISA Microchannel VESA BIOSes IPC SYSVIPC ipc Ctrl dmesg hlt
|
5065 |
|
|
# LocalWords: BINFMT Linkable http ac uk jo html GCC SPARC AVANTI CABRIOLET EB
|
5066 |
|
|
# LocalWords: netscape gcc LD CC toplevel MODVERSIONS insmod rmmod modprobe IP
|
5067 |
|
|
# LocalWords: genksyms INET loopback gatewaying Ethernet internet PPP ARP Arp
|
5068 |
|
|
# LocalWords: howto multicasting MULTICAST MBONE firewalling ipfw ACCT resp ip
|
5069 |
|
|
# LocalWords: proc acct IPIP encapsulator decapsulator klogd PCTCP RARP EXT PS
|
5070 |
|
|
# LocalWords: telneting subnetted NAGLE rlogin NOSR ttyS TGA techinfo mbone nl
|
5071 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Mb SKB IPX Novell NetWare dosemu AppleTalk DDP ATALK tapedrive
|
5072 |
|
|
# LocalWords: SD CHR scsi thingy SG CD LUNs LUN jukebox Adaptec BusLogic EATA
|
5073 |
|
|
# LocalWords: buslogic DMA DPT ATT eata dma PIO UltraStor fdomain umsdos ext
|
5074 |
|
|
# LocalWords: QLOGIC qlogic TMC seagate Trantor ultrastor FASST wd NETDEVICES
|
5075 |
|
|
# LocalWords: unix BBS linux nullmodem CSLIP PLIP Kirch's LDP CSlip SL SCC IRQ
|
5076 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Turbo Laplink plip NCSA port's ReQuest IRQs EQL SMC AMD PCnet NE
|
5077 |
|
|
# LocalWords: COM ELPLUS Com EtherLinkIII VLB Arcnet arcnet Cabletron DEPCA DE
|
5078 |
|
|
# LocalWords: depca EtherWorks EWRK ewrk SEEQ EtherExpressPro EEXPRESS NI xxx
|
5079 |
|
|
# LocalWords: EtherExpress WaveLAN wavelan PCLAN HPLAN VG SK Ansel Xen de ZNET
|
5080 |
|
|
# LocalWords: PCMCIA cb stanford pcmcia LAN TEC RealTek ATP atp DLINK NetTools
|
5081 |
|
|
# LocalWords: TR Sony CDU caddyless cdu Mitsumi MCD cd mcd XA MultiSession CDA
|
5082 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Matsushita Panasonic SBPCD Soundblaster Longshine sbpcd Aztech
|
5083 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Okano Wearnes AZTCD CDD SE aztcd sonycd Goldstar GSCD Philips fs
|
5084 |
|
|
# LocalWords: LMS OPTCD Sanyo SJCD minix faqs xiafs XIA msdos mtools
|
5085 |
|
|
# LocalWords: std softlinks umssync NetworkFileSharing nfsd mountd CDs HPFS TI
|
5086 |
|
|
# LocalWords: hpfs SYSV SCO Intel iBCS Wyse WordPerfect tsx mit unixes sysv NR
|
5087 |
|
|
# LocalWords: SMB WfW Cyclades async mux Logitech busmouse MouseSystem aka AST
|
5088 |
|
|
# LocalWords: PSMOUSE Compaq trackballs Travelmate Inport ATIXL ATI busmice ld
|
5089 |
|
|
# LocalWords: gpm config QIC DYNCONF FTAPE Stor Ftape ftape pcsndrv manpage NT
|
5090 |
|
|
# LocalWords: readprofile diskdrives org com masq EtherTalk tcp netrom sunacm
|
5091 |
|
|
# LocalWords: misc AIC aic pio nullmodems scc Portmaster eql GIS PhotoCDs MCDX
|
5092 |
|
|
# LocalWords: mcdx gscd optcd sjcd ISP hdparm Workgroups Lan samba
|
5093 |
|
|
# LocalWords: filesystems smbfs ATA ppp PCTech RZ www powerquest txt CMD ESDI
|
5094 |
|
|
# LocalWords: chipset FB multicast MROUTE ifconfig IBMTR multiport
|
5095 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Multisession STALDRV EasyIO EC EasyConnection ISTALLION ONboard
|
5096 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Brumby pci TNC cis ohio faq usenet NETLINK dev hydra ca Tyne mem
|
5097 |
|
|
# LocalWords: carleton Deskstation DECstation SUNFD JENSEN Noname XXXM SLiRP
|
5098 |
|
|
# LocalWords: pppd Zilog ZS SRM bootloader ez mainmenu rarp ipfwadm
|
5099 |
|
|
# LocalWords: RTNETLINK mknod xos MTU lwared Macs mac netatalk macs cs Wolff
|
5100 |
|
|
# LocalWords: dartmouth flowerpt MultiMaster FlashPoint tudelft etherexpress
|
5101 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ICL EtherTeam ETH IDESCSI TXC SmartRAID SmartCache httpd sjc dlp
|
5102 |
|
|
# LocalWords: thesphere TwoServers BOOTP DHCP ncpfs BPQETHER BPQ chipsets MG
|
5103 |
|
|
# LocalWords: bsd comp SPARCstation le SunOS ie Gracilis PackeTwin PT pt LU FX
|
5104 |
|
|
# LocalWords: FX TEAC SoundBlaster CR CreativeLabs LCS mS ramdisk IDETAPE cmd
|
5105 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Vertos Genoa Funai hsfs NCP NetWare tgz APM apm ioctls UltraLite
|
5106 |
|
|
# LocalWords: TravelMate CDT LCD backlight VC RPC Mips DECStation AXP barlow
|
5107 |
|
|
# LocalWords: PMAX MILO Alphas Multia Tseng linuxelf endian mipsel mips drv HT
|
5108 |
|
|
# LocalWords: KERNELD kerneld callouts AdvanSys advansys diskquotas Admin WDT
|
5109 |
|
|
# LocalWords: wdt hdb hdc bugfix SiS vlb Acculogic CSA DTC dtc Holtek ht QDI
|
5110 |
|
|
# LocalWords: QD qd UMC umc ALI ali lena fnet fr homepage azstarnet axplinux
|
5111 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Avanti XL AlphaStations Jensen DECpc AXPpci UDB Cabriolet MCA RC
|
5112 |
|
|
# LocalWords: AlphaPC uwaterloo cpbeaure mca AOUT OUTput PPro sipx gwdg lo nwe
|
5113 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Keepalive linefill RELCOM keepalive analogue CDR conf CDI INIT
|
5114 |
|
|
# LocalWords: OPTi isp irq noisp VFAT vfat NTFS losetup dmsdosfs dosfs ISDN MP
|
5115 |
|
|
# LocalWords: NOWAYOUT behaviour dialin isdn callback BTX Teles ICN EDSS Cisco
|
5116 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ipppd syncppp RFC MPP VJ downloaded icn NICCY Creatix shmem ufr
|
5117 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ibp md ARCnet ether encap NDIS arcether ODI Amigas AmiTCP NetBSD
|
5118 |
|
|
# LocalWords: initrd tue util DES funet des OnNet BIOSP smc Travan Iomega CMS
|
5119 |
|
|
# LocalWords: FC DC dc PPA ppa RNFS FMV Fujitsu ARPD arpd loran layes
|
5120 |
|
|
# LocalWords: FRAD indiana framerelay DLCI DCLIs Sangoma SDLA mrouted sync sec
|
5121 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Starmode Metricom MosquitoNet mosquitonet kbit nfsroot Digiboard
|
5122 |
|
|
# LocalWords: DIGI Xe Xeve digiboard UMISC touchscreens mtu HBAs MEX
|
5123 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Shifflett netcom js jshiffle WIC DECchip ELCP EtherPower dst RTC
|
5124 |
|
|
# LocalWords: rtc SMP lp Digi Intl RightSwitch DGRS dgrs AFFS Amiga UFS SDL AP
|
5125 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Solaris RISCom riscom syncPPP PCBIT pcbit sparc anu au artoo ufs
|
5126 |
|
|
# LocalWords: hitchcock Crynwr cnam pktdrvr NCSA's CyDROM CyCDROM FreeBSD NeXT
|
5127 |
|
|
# LocalWords: NeXTstep disklabel disklabels SMD FFS tm AmigaOS diskfiles Un IQ
|
5128 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Bernd informatik rwth aachen uae affs multihosting bytecode java
|
5129 |
|
|
# LocalWords: applets applet JDK ncsa cabi SNI Alphatronix readme LANs scarab
|
5130 |
|
|
# LocalWords: winsock RNIS caltech OSPF honour Honouring Mbit Localtalk DEFRAG
|
5131 |
|
|
# LocalWords: download Packetwin Baycom baycom interwork ascii JNT
|
5132 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Camtec proxying indyramp defragment defragmented UDP FAS FASXX
|
5133 |
|
|
# LocalWords: FastSCSI SIO FDC qlogicfas QLogic qlogicisp setbaycom ife ee LJ
|
5134 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ethz ch Travelmates ProAudioSpectrum ProAudio SoundMan SB SBPro
|
5135 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Thunderboard SM OPL FM ADLIB TSR Gravis MPU PSS ADI SW DSP codec
|
5136 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ADSP ESC ASIC daughtercard GUSMAX MSS NX AdLib Excell Ensoniq YM
|
5137 |
|
|
# LocalWords: SoundScape Spea MediaTriX AudioTriX WSS OTI ThunderBoard VoxWare
|
5138 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Soundscape SSCAPE TRIX MediaTrix PnP Maui dsp midixx EIA getty
|
5139 |
|
|
# LocalWords: mgetty sendfax gert greenie muc lowlevel Lasermate LanManager io
|
5140 |
|
|
# LocalWords: OOPSes trackball binghamton mobileip ncr IOMAPPED settags ns ser
|
5141 |
|
|
# LocalWords: setsync NEGO MPARITY autotuning prefetch PIIX cdwrite utils rc
|
5142 |
|
|
# LocalWords: PCWATCHDOG berkprod bitgate Boldt boldt ucsb jf kyoto jp euc ntt
|
5143 |
|
|
# LocalWords: Tetsuyasu YAMADA tetsu cauchy nslab nevod perm su doc kaf kheops
|
5144 |
|
|
# LocalWords: traduc Bourgin dbourgin wsc helptext menuconfig kfill READMEs DS
|
5145 |
|
|
# LocalWords: HOWTOs firewalls SYN RST QMAGIC ZMAGIC ipautofw netis rlynch syr
|
5146 |
|
|
# LocalWords: ICMP tracert Xterminal Xkernel jmwobus comfaqs dhcp radio's tapr
|
5147 |
|
|
# LocalWords: pkthome lnxbay RoamAbout mconv sed LocalWords
|